WO2019239790A1 - Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method - Google Patents

Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019239790A1
WO2019239790A1 PCT/JP2019/019695 JP2019019695W WO2019239790A1 WO 2019239790 A1 WO2019239790 A1 WO 2019239790A1 JP 2019019695 W JP2019019695 W JP 2019019695W WO 2019239790 A1 WO2019239790 A1 WO 2019239790A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
block
decoding
encoding
vector
unit
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/019695
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
遠間 正真
西 孝啓
安倍 清史
Original Assignee
パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ filed Critical パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ
Publication of WO2019239790A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019239790A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/46Embedding additional information in the video signal during the compression process
    • H04N19/463Embedding additional information in the video signal during the compression process by compressing encoding parameters before transmission
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/593Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving spatial prediction techniques

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to an encoding device that encodes a moving image including a plurality of pictures.
  • H.C. High Efficiency Video Coding
  • H.265 exists (Non-Patent Document 1).
  • the present disclosure provides an encoding device or the like that can reduce the amount of codes compared to the conventional one when performing IBC in an inter prediction unit.
  • An encoding apparatus includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to generate a prediction block and an encoding target block that are configured from encoded pixels in a screen.
  • the circuit uses the memory to generate a prediction block and an encoding target block that are configured from encoded pixels in a screen.
  • the encoding apparatus and the like according to one aspect of the present disclosure can reduce the amount of codes compared to the conventional one when performing IBC in the inter prediction unit.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the encoding apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of block division in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a table showing conversion basis functions corresponding to each conversion type.
  • FIG. 4A is a diagram illustrating an example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
  • FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
  • FIG. 4C is a diagram illustrating another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction.
  • FIG. 5B is a flowchart for explaining the outline of the predicted image correction process by the OBMC process.
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction.
  • FIG. 5B is a flowchart for explaining the outline of the predicted image correction process by the OBMC process.
  • FIG. 5A is a
  • FIG. 5C is a conceptual diagram for explaining the outline of the predicted image correction process by the OBMC process.
  • FIG. 5D is a diagram illustrating an example of FRUC.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along the motion trajectory.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining pattern matching (template matching) between a template in the current picture and a block in the reference picture.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming constant velocity linear motion.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram for explaining derivation of a motion vector in units of sub-blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining the outline of the motion vector deriving process in the merge mode.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram for explaining derivation of a motion vector in units of sub-blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining the outline of
  • FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of DMVR processing.
  • FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an overview of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating a current block and a referenceable area in the embodiment.
  • FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a block vector in the embodiment.
  • FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating a case where the horizontal component of the block vector in the embodiment is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block.
  • FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating a case where the vertical component of the block vector in the embodiment is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction.
  • FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating a current block and a referenceable area in the embodiment.
  • FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a block vector in the embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of an encoding apparatus that performs encoding in the IBC mode in the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of a decoding device that decodes a bitstream encoded by the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the loop filter consideration limitation in the embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the encoding device according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the encoding apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is an overall configuration diagram of a content supply system that implements a content distribution service.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a web page display screen.
  • FIG. 24 shows an example of a web page display screen.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a smartphone.
  • FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a smartphone.
  • inter prediction can be performed in the encoding of a moving image.
  • inter prediction a coded picture or a picture that has not been coded and is close in time order to the coding target picture is used as a reference picture.
  • inter prediction not limited to the above, it is possible to refer to decoded pixels in the current picture that is a picture including the current block.
  • This process is called intra block copy (IBC) because it can refer to pixels in the current picture.
  • the IBC can be used as one of normal inter prediction modes, and can be used with any of the merge mode, normal inter mode, skip mode, and the like.
  • IBC a vector representing a displacement of a position between a current block and a reference block in a current picture is referred to as a block vector (BV: Block Vector).
  • an encoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to generate a prediction block including encoded pixels in a screen.
  • the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is As the information indicating the first component, the block vector is encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size in the first direction of the block to be encoded from the first component of the block vector.
  • the encoding device subtracts the horizontal size of the current block from the horizontal component of the block vector, or the vertical direction of the current block from the vertical component of the block vector.
  • the value obtained by subtracting the size of can be encoded. Therefore, the encoding device can reduce the code amount.
  • the predetermined condition is a second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction. Is smaller than the size of the encoding target block in the second direction.
  • the encoding apparatus can use the fact that the vertical component of the block vector is larger than the vertical size of the current block when the horizontal component of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block, to reduce the code amount. .
  • the encoding device can encode a value obtained by subtracting the vertical size of the current block from the vertical component of the block vector instead of encoding the vertical component of the block vector.
  • the encoding device can use the fact that when the vertical component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction, the horizontal component of the block vector is larger than the size of the current block in the horizontal direction to reduce the code amount.
  • the encoding apparatus can encode a value obtained by subtracting the horizontal size of the current block from the horizontal component of the block vector instead of encoding the horizontal component of the block vector. Therefore, the encoding device can reduce the code amount.
  • the predetermined condition is a second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction. Is not a negative value.
  • the encoding apparatus can use the fact that the reference block exists in the referenceable area when the value of the component of the block vector is not negative to reduce the code amount.
  • the encoding apparatus encodes a value obtained by subtracting the horizontal size of the current block from the horizontal component of the block vector, or a value obtained by subtracting the vertical size of the current block from the vertical component of the block vector. Can do. Therefore, the encoding device can reduce the code amount.
  • a decoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to decode a prediction block including pixels of a decoded block in a screen.
  • the circuit uses the memory to decode a prediction block including pixels of a decoded block in a screen.
  • the decoding apparatus decodes information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector and adds the horizontal size of the current block, thereby obtaining the horizontal component of the block vector. Can be acquired.
  • the decoding device decodes information indicating the vertical component of the block vector and adds the vertical size of the current block to obtain the vertical component of the block vector. can do. Therefore, the decoding apparatus can reduce the code amount.
  • the predetermined condition is that the second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction is The size of the block to be decoded is smaller than the size in the second direction.
  • the decoding apparatus can use the fact that the vertical component of the block vector is larger than the vertical size of the current block when the horizontal component of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block, for reducing the code amount.
  • the decoding apparatus can acquire the horizontal component of the block vector by decoding the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector and adding the horizontal size of the current block.
  • the decoding apparatus can use the fact that when the vertical component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction, the horizontal component of the block vector is larger than the size of the current block in the horizontal direction to reduce the code amount.
  • the decoding apparatus can obtain the vertical component of the block vector by decoding the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector and adding the size of the current block in the vertical direction. Therefore, the decoding apparatus can reduce the code amount.
  • the predetermined condition is that the second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction is It is not a negative value.
  • the decoding apparatus can use the fact that the reference block exists in the referenceable area when the value of the component of the block vector is not negative to reduce the code amount.
  • the decoding apparatus instead of decoding the block vector component, decodes information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, and adds the horizontal size of the current block to the decoded value.
  • the horizontal component can be acquired.
  • the decoding device decodes information indicating the vertical component of the block vector instead of decoding the component of the block vector, and adds the vertical size of the current block to the decoded value, thereby obtaining the vertical value of the block vector. Ingredients can be obtained. Therefore, the decoding apparatus can reduce the code amount.
  • the encoding method encodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position between a prediction block configured with encoded pixels in a screen and a block to be encoded, and the block
  • the code from the first component of the block vector is used as information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the block vector is encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size of the block to be converted in the first direction.
  • the encoding method can achieve the same effect as the above encoding apparatus.
  • the decoding method decodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position between a prediction block configured with pixels of a decoded block in a screen and a decoding target block,
  • the first value of the decoding target block is determined with respect to a value obtained by decoding information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the block vector is decoded by adding the size in the direction.
  • the decoding method can achieve the same effect as the above decoding apparatus.
  • an encoding device includes a dividing unit, an intra prediction unit, an inter prediction unit, a loop filter unit, a conversion unit, a quantization unit, and an entropy encoding unit. You may prepare.
  • the dividing unit may divide a picture into a plurality of blocks.
  • the intra prediction unit may perform intra prediction on blocks included in the plurality of blocks.
  • the inter prediction unit may perform inter prediction on the block.
  • the conversion unit may generate a conversion coefficient by converting a prediction error between a predicted image obtained by the intra prediction or the inter prediction and an original image.
  • the quantization unit may quantize the transform coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient.
  • the entropy encoding unit may generate an encoded bitstream by encoding the quantization coefficient.
  • the loop filter unit may apply a filter to the reconstructed image of the block.
  • the encoding device may be an encoding device that encodes a moving image including a plurality of pictures.
  • the inter prediction unit encodes a block vector indicating the displacement of the position of the prediction block composed of the encoded pixels in the screen and the encoding target block, and in the encoding of the block vector, a predetermined condition When satisfying, as information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, from the first component of the block vector to the first direction of the encoding target block
  • the block vector may be encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size.
  • the decoding device may include an entropy decoding unit, an inverse quantization unit, an inverse transform unit, an intra prediction unit, an inter prediction unit, and a loop filter unit. .
  • the entropy decoding unit may decode the quantization coefficient of the block in the picture from the encoded bit stream.
  • the inverse quantization unit may obtain the transform coefficient by inverse quantization of the quantization coefficient.
  • the inverse transform unit may inversely transform the transform coefficient to obtain a prediction error.
  • the intra prediction unit may perform intra prediction on the block.
  • the inter prediction unit may perform inter prediction on the block.
  • the filter unit may apply a filter to a reconstructed image generated using a prediction image obtained by the intra prediction or the inter prediction and the prediction error.
  • the decoding device may be a decoding device that decodes a moving image including a plurality of pictures.
  • the inter prediction unit decodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a prediction block constituted by pixels of a decoded block in the screen and a decoding target block, and satisfies a predetermined condition in the decoding of the block vector
  • the size in the first direction of the decoding target block is added to the value obtained by decoding the information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction,
  • the block vector may be decoded.
  • these comprehensive or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer-readable CD-ROM.
  • the present invention may be realized by any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a recording medium.
  • an outline of the first embodiment will be described as an example of an encoding device and a decoding device to which the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure to be described later can be applied.
  • the first embodiment is merely an example of an encoding device and a decoding device to which the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure can be applied, and the processing and / or processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure.
  • the configuration can also be implemented in an encoding device and a decoding device different from those in the first embodiment.
  • the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment corresponds to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure among a plurality of constituent elements constituting the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus. Replacing the constituent elements with constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure (2) A plurality of constituent elements constituting the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus with respect to the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus of the first embodiment The constituent elements corresponding to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure are added to the present disclosure after arbitrary changes such as addition, replacement, and deletion of functions or processes to be performed on some constituent elements among the constituent elements.
  • a component that performs a part of processing performed by a component is a component that is described in each aspect of the present disclosure, a component that includes a part of a function included in a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, or a book (6)
  • a method performed by the encoding device or the decoding device according to Embodiment 1 is performed in combination with a component that performs a part of processing performed by the component described in each aspect of the disclosure.
  • the process corresponding to the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure is replaced with the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure.
  • the encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment or A part of the plurality of processes included in the method performed by the decoding device is performed in combination with the processes described in each aspect of the present disclosure
  • the processes and / or configurations described in each aspect of the present disclosure are not limited to the above examples.
  • the present invention may be implemented in an apparatus used for a different purpose from the moving picture / picture encoding apparatus or moving picture / picture decoding apparatus disclosed in the first embodiment, and the processing and / or described in each aspect.
  • the configuration may be implemented alone.
  • you may implement combining the process and / or structure which were demonstrated in the different aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of encoding apparatus 100 according to Embodiment 1.
  • the encoding device 100 is a moving image / image encoding device that encodes moving images / images in units of blocks.
  • an encoding apparatus 100 is an apparatus that encodes an image in units of blocks, and includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a transforming unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, and entropy encoding.
  • Unit 110 inverse quantization unit 112, inverse transform unit 114, addition unit 116, block memory 118, loop filter unit 120, frame memory 122, intra prediction unit 124, inter prediction unit 126, A prediction control unit 128.
  • the encoding device 100 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory.
  • the processor when the software program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the processor performs the division unit 102, the subtraction unit 104, the conversion unit 106, the quantization unit 108, the entropy encoding unit 110, and the inverse quantization unit 112.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a transforming unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, an entropy coding unit 110, an inverse quantizing unit 112, an inverse transforming unit 114, an adding unit 116, and a loop filter unit 120.
  • the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128 may be implemented as one or more dedicated electronic circuits.
  • the dividing unit 102 divides each picture included in the input moving image into a plurality of blocks, and outputs each block to the subtracting unit 104.
  • the dividing unit 102 first divides a picture into blocks of a fixed size (for example, 128 ⁇ 128).
  • This fixed size block may be referred to as a coding tree unit (CTU).
  • the dividing unit 102 divides each of the fixed size blocks into blocks of a variable size (for example, 64 ⁇ 64 or less) based on recursive quadtree and / or binary tree block division.
  • This variable size block may be referred to as a coding unit (CU), a prediction unit (PU) or a transform unit (TU).
  • CU, PU, and TU do not need to be distinguished, and some or all blocks in a picture may be processing units of CU, PU, and TU.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment.
  • a solid line represents a block boundary by quadtree block division
  • a broken line represents a block boundary by binary tree block division.
  • the block 10 is a 128 ⁇ 128 pixel square block (128 ⁇ 128 block).
  • the 128 ⁇ 128 block 10 is first divided into four square 64 ⁇ 64 blocks (quadtree block division).
  • the upper left 64 ⁇ 64 block is further divided vertically into two rectangular 32 ⁇ 64 blocks, and the left 32 ⁇ 64 block is further divided vertically into two rectangular 16 ⁇ 64 blocks (binary tree block division). As a result, the upper left 64 ⁇ 64 block is divided into two 16 ⁇ 64 blocks 11 and 12 and a 32 ⁇ 64 block 13.
  • the upper right 64 ⁇ 64 block is horizontally divided into two rectangular 64 ⁇ 32 blocks 14 and 15 (binary tree block division).
  • the lower left 64x64 block is divided into four square 32x32 blocks (quadrant block division). Of the four 32 ⁇ 32 blocks, the upper left block and the lower right block are further divided.
  • the upper left 32 ⁇ 32 block is vertically divided into two rectangular 16 ⁇ 32 blocks, and the right 16 ⁇ 32 block is further divided horizontally into two 16 ⁇ 16 blocks (binary tree block division).
  • the lower right 32 ⁇ 32 block is horizontally divided into two 32 ⁇ 16 blocks (binary tree block division).
  • the lower left 64 ⁇ 64 block is divided into a 16 ⁇ 32 block 16, two 16 ⁇ 16 blocks 17 and 18, two 32 ⁇ 32 blocks 19 and 20, and two 32 ⁇ 16 blocks 21 and 22.
  • the lower right 64x64 block 23 is not divided.
  • the block 10 is divided into 13 variable-size blocks 11 to 23 based on the recursive quadtree and binary tree block division.
  • Such division may be called QTBT (quad-tree plus binary tree) division.
  • one block is divided into four or two blocks (quadrature tree or binary tree block division), but the division is not limited to this.
  • one block may be divided into three blocks (triple tree block division).
  • Such a division including a tri-tree block division may be called an MBT (multi type tree) division.
  • the subtraction unit 104 subtracts the prediction signal (prediction sample) from the original signal (original sample) in units of blocks divided by the division unit 102. That is, the subtraction unit 104 calculates a prediction error (also referred to as a residual) of a coding target block (hereinafter referred to as a current block). Then, the subtraction unit 104 outputs the calculated prediction error to the conversion unit 106.
  • a prediction error also referred to as a residual of a coding target block (hereinafter referred to as a current block).
  • the original signal is an input signal of the encoding device 100, and is a signal (for example, a luminance (luma) signal and two color difference (chroma) signals) representing an image of each picture constituting the moving image.
  • a signal representing an image may be referred to as a sample.
  • the transform unit 106 transforms the prediction error in the spatial domain into a transform factor in the frequency domain, and outputs the transform coefficient to the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the transform unit 106 performs, for example, a predetermined discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on a prediction error in the spatial domain.
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • DST discrete sine transform
  • the conversion unit 106 adaptively selects a conversion type from a plurality of conversion types, and converts a prediction error into a conversion coefficient using a conversion basis function corresponding to the selected conversion type. May be. Such a conversion may be referred to as EMT (explicit multiple core transform) or AMT (adaptive multiple transform).
  • the plurality of conversion types include, for example, DCT-II, DCT-V, DCT-VIII, DST-I and DST-VII.
  • FIG. 3 is a table showing conversion basis functions corresponding to each conversion type. In FIG. 3, N indicates the number of input pixels. Selection of a conversion type from among these multiple conversion types may depend on, for example, the type of prediction (intra prediction and inter prediction), or may depend on an intra prediction mode.
  • Information indicating whether or not to apply such EMT or AMT (for example, called an AMT flag) and information indicating the selected conversion type are signaled at the CU level.
  • AMT flag information indicating whether or not to apply such EMT or AMT
  • the signalization of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be other levels (for example, a sequence level, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level).
  • the conversion unit 106 may reconvert the conversion coefficient (conversion result). Such reconversion is sometimes referred to as AST (adaptive secondary transform) or NSST (non-separable secondary transform). For example, the conversion unit 106 performs re-conversion for each sub-block (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 sub-block) included in the block of the conversion coefficient corresponding to the intra prediction error. Information indicating whether or not NSST is applied and information related to the transformation matrix used for NSST are signaled at the CU level. Note that the signalization of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be other levels (for example, a sequence level, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level).
  • the separable conversion is a method of performing the conversion a plurality of times by separating the number of dimensions of the input for each direction, and the non-separable conversion is two or more when the input is multidimensional.
  • the dimensions are collectively regarded as one dimension, and conversion is performed collectively.
  • non-separable conversion if an input is a 4 ⁇ 4 block, it is regarded as one array having 16 elements, and 16 ⁇ 16 conversion is performed on the array. The thing which performs the conversion process with a matrix is mentioned.
  • a 4 ⁇ 4 input block is regarded as a single array having 16 elements, and then the Givens rotation is performed multiple times on the array (Hypercube Givens Transform) is also a non-separable. It is an example of conversion.
  • the quantization unit 108 quantizes the transform coefficient output from the transform unit 106. Specifically, the quantization unit 108 scans the transform coefficients of the current block in a predetermined scanning order, and quantizes the transform coefficients based on the quantization parameter (QP) corresponding to the scanned transform coefficients. Then, the quantization unit 108 outputs the quantized transform coefficient (hereinafter referred to as a quantization coefficient) of the current block to the entropy encoding unit 110 and the inverse quantization unit 112.
  • QP quantization parameter
  • the predetermined order is an order for quantization / inverse quantization of transform coefficients.
  • the predetermined scanning order is defined in ascending order of frequency (order from low frequency to high frequency) or descending order (order from high frequency to low frequency).
  • the quantization parameter is a parameter that defines a quantization step (quantization width). For example, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization step also increases. That is, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization error increases.
  • the entropy encoding unit 110 generates an encoded signal (encoded bit stream) by performing variable length encoding on the quantization coefficient that is input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the entropy encoding unit 110 binarizes the quantization coefficient, for example, and arithmetically encodes the binary signal.
  • the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient that is an input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scanning order. Then, the inverse quantization unit 112 outputs the inverse-quantized transform coefficient of the current block to the inverse transform unit 114.
  • the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error by inverse transforming the transform coefficient that is an input from the inverse quantization unit 112. Specifically, the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error of the current block by performing an inverse transform corresponding to the transform by the transform unit 106 on the transform coefficient. Then, the inverse transformation unit 114 outputs the restored prediction error to the addition unit 116.
  • the restored prediction error does not match the prediction error calculated by the subtraction unit 104 because information is lost due to quantization. That is, the restored prediction error includes a quantization error.
  • the adder 116 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error input from the inverse transform unit 114 and the prediction sample input from the prediction control unit 128. Then, the adding unit 116 outputs the reconfigured block to the block memory 118 and the loop filter unit 120.
  • the reconstructed block is sometimes referred to as a local decoding block.
  • the block memory 118 is a storage unit for storing blocks in an encoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as current picture) that are referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 118 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 116.
  • the loop filter unit 120 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 116 and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 122.
  • the loop filter is a filter (in-loop filter) used in the encoding loop, and includes, for example, a deblocking filter (DF), a sample adaptive offset (SAO), an adaptive loop filter (ALF), and the like.
  • a least square error filter is applied to remove coding distortion. For example, for each 2 ⁇ 2 sub-block in the current block, a plurality of multiples based on the direction of the local gradient and the activity are provided. One filter selected from the filters is applied.
  • sub-blocks for example, 2 ⁇ 2 sub-blocks
  • a plurality of classes for example, 15 or 25 classes.
  • the direction value D of the gradient is derived, for example, by comparing gradients in a plurality of directions (for example, horizontal, vertical, and two diagonal directions).
  • the gradient activation value A is derived, for example, by adding gradients in a plurality of directions and quantizing the addition result.
  • a filter for a sub-block is determined from among a plurality of filters.
  • FIG. 4A to 4C are diagrams showing a plurality of examples of filter shapes used in ALF.
  • 4A shows a 5 ⁇ 5 diamond shape filter
  • FIG. 4B shows a 7 ⁇ 7 diamond shape filter
  • FIG. 4C shows a 9 ⁇ 9 diamond shape filter.
  • Information indicating the shape of the filter is signalized at the picture level. It should be noted that the signalization of the information indicating the filter shape need not be limited to the picture level, but may be another level (for example, a sequence level, a slice level, a tile level, a CTU level, or a CU level).
  • ON / OFF of ALF is determined at the picture level or the CU level, for example. For example, for luminance, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the CU level, and for color difference, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the picture level.
  • Information indicating ALF on / off is signaled at the picture level or the CU level. Signaling of information indicating ALF on / off need not be limited to the picture level or the CU level, and may be performed at other levels (for example, a sequence level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level). Good.
  • a coefficient set of a plurality of selectable filters (for example, up to 15 or 25 filters) is signalized at the picture level.
  • the signalization of the coefficient set need not be limited to the picture level, but may be another level (for example, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, CU level, or sub-block level).
  • the frame memory 122 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and is sometimes called a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 122 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 120.
  • the intra prediction unit 124 generates a prediction signal (intra prediction signal) by referring to the block in the current picture stored in the block memory 118 and performing intra prediction (also referred to as intra-screen prediction) of the current block. Specifically, the intra prediction unit 124 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to a sample (for example, luminance value and color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. To the unit 128.
  • the intra prediction unit 124 performs intra prediction using one of a plurality of predefined intra prediction modes.
  • the plurality of intra prediction modes include one or more non-directional prediction modes and a plurality of directional prediction modes.
  • One or more non-directional prediction modes are for example H.264. It includes Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined by H.265 / HEVC (High-Efficiency Video Coding) standard (Non-patent Document 1).
  • the multiple directionality prediction modes are for example H.264. It includes 33-direction prediction modes defined by the H.265 / HEVC standard. In addition to the 33 directions, the plurality of directionality prediction modes may further include 32 direction prediction modes (a total of 65 directionality prediction modes).
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes (two non-directional prediction modes and 65 directional prediction modes) in intra prediction. Solid arrows indicate H. The 33 directions defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard are represented, and the dashed arrow represents the added 32 directions.
  • the luminance block may be referred to in the intra prediction of the color difference block. That is, the color difference component of the current block may be predicted based on the luminance component of the current block.
  • Such intra prediction is sometimes called CCLM (cross-component linear model) prediction.
  • the intra prediction mode (for example, called CCLM mode) of the color difference block which refers to such a luminance block may be added as one of the intra prediction modes of the color difference block.
  • the intra prediction unit 124 may correct the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical direction. Intra prediction with such correction may be called PDPC (position dependent intra prediction combination). Information indicating whether or not PDPC is applied (for example, referred to as a PDPC flag) is signaled, for example, at the CU level.
  • the signalization of this information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be another level (for example, a sequence level, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level).
  • the inter prediction unit 126 refers to a reference picture stored in the frame memory 122 and is different from the current picture, and performs inter prediction (also referred to as inter-screen prediction) of the current block, thereby generating a prediction signal (inter prediction signal). Prediction signal). Inter prediction is performed in units of a current block or a sub-block (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 block) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 performs motion estimation in the reference picture for the current block or sub-block. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub-block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) obtained by motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 outputs the generated inter prediction signal to the prediction control unit 128.
  • inter prediction also referred to as inter-screen prediction
  • a motion vector predictor may be used for signalizing the motion vector. That is, the difference between the motion vector and the predicted motion vector may be signaled.
  • an inter prediction signal may be generated using not only the motion information of the current block obtained by motion search but also the motion information of adjacent blocks. Specifically, the inter prediction signal is generated in units of sub-blocks in the current block by weighted addition of the prediction signal based on the motion information obtained by motion search and the prediction signal based on the motion information of adjacent blocks. May be.
  • Such inter prediction motion compensation
  • OBMC overlapped block motion compensation
  • OBMC block size information indicating the size of a sub-block for OBMC
  • OBMC flag information indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC mode
  • the level of signalization of these information does not need to be limited to the sequence level and the CU level, and may be other levels (for example, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, a CTU level, or a sub-block level). Good.
  • FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C are a flowchart and a conceptual diagram for explaining the outline of the predicted image correction process by the OBMC process.
  • a prediction image (Pred) by normal motion compensation is acquired using a motion vector (MV) assigned to an encoding target block.
  • MV motion vector
  • a prediction image (Pred_L) is obtained by applying the motion vector (MV_L) of the encoded left adjacent block to the encoding target block, and prediction is performed by superimposing the prediction image and Pred_L with weights. Perform the first correction of the image.
  • the motion vector (MV_U) of the encoded upper adjacent block is applied to the block to be encoded to obtain a prediction image (Pred_U), and the prediction image and Pred_U that have been subjected to the first correction are weighted. Then, the second correction of the predicted image is performed by superimposing and making it the final predicted image.
  • the two-step correction method using the left adjacent block and the upper adjacent block has been described here, the correction may be performed more times than the two steps using the right adjacent block and the lower adjacent block. Is possible.
  • the area to be overlapped may not be the pixel area of the entire block, but only a part of the area near the block boundary.
  • the processing target block may be a prediction block unit or a sub-block unit obtained by further dividing the prediction block.
  • obmc_flag is a signal indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC process.
  • the encoding apparatus it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to a complex motion region, and if it belongs to a complex motion region, a value 1 is set as obmc_flag. Encoding is performed by applying the OBMC process, and if it does not belong to a complex region of motion, the value 0 is set as obmc_flag and the encoding is performed without applying the OBMC process.
  • the decoding device decodes obj_flag described in the stream, and performs decoding by switching whether to apply the OBMC processing according to the value.
  • the motion information may be derived on the decoding device side without being converted into a signal.
  • H.M. A merge mode defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard may be used.
  • the motion information may be derived by performing motion search on the decoding device side. In this case, motion search is performed without using the pixel value of the current block.
  • the mode in which the motion search is performed on the decoding apparatus side is sometimes called a PMMVD (patterned motion vector derivation) mode or an FRUC (frame rate up-conversion) mode.
  • PMMVD patterned motion vector derivation
  • FRUC frame rate up-conversion
  • FIG. 5D An example of FRUC processing is shown in FIG. 5D.
  • a list of a plurality of candidates each having a predicted motion vector (may be common with the merge list) is generated Is done.
  • the best candidate MV is selected from a plurality of candidate MVs registered in the candidate list. For example, the evaluation value of each candidate included in the candidate list is calculated, and one candidate is selected based on the evaluation value.
  • a motion vector for the current block is derived based on the selected candidate motion vector.
  • the selected candidate motion vector (best candidate MV) is directly derived as a motion vector for the current block.
  • a motion vector for the current block may be derived by performing pattern matching in a peripheral region at a position in the reference picture corresponding to the selected candidate motion vector. That is, the same method is used to search the area around the best candidate MV, and if there is an MV with a better evaluation value, the best candidate MV is updated to the MV, and the current block is updated. The final MV may be used. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the processing is not performed.
  • the same processing may be performed when processing is performed in units of sub-blocks.
  • the evaluation value is calculated by obtaining a difference value of the reconstructed image by pattern matching between a region in the reference picture corresponding to the motion vector and a predetermined region. Note that the evaluation value may be calculated using information other than the difference value.
  • the first pattern matching and the second pattern matching may be referred to as bilateral matching and template matching, respectively.
  • pattern matching is performed between two blocks in two different reference pictures that follow the motion trajectory of the current block. Therefore, in the first pattern matching, a region in another reference picture along the motion trajectory of the current block is used as the predetermined region for calculating the candidate evaluation value described above.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory.
  • first pattern matching two blocks along the motion trajectory of the current block (Cur block) and two blocks in two different reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) are used.
  • two motion vectors MV0, MV1 are derived.
  • MV0, MV1 a reconstructed image at a designated position in the first encoded reference picture (Ref0) designated by the candidate MV, and a symmetric MV obtained by scaling the candidate MV at a display time interval.
  • the difference from the reconstructed image at the designated position in the second encoded reference picture (Ref1) designated in (2) is derived, and the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value.
  • the candidate MV having the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs may be selected as the final MV.
  • the motion vectors (MV0, MV1) pointing to the two reference blocks are temporal distances between the current picture (Cur Pic) and the two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1). It is proportional to (TD0, TD1).
  • the first pattern matching uses a mirror-symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived.
  • pattern matching is performed between a template in the current picture (a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture (for example, an upper and / or left adjacent block)) and a block in the reference picture. Therefore, in the second pattern matching, a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture is used as the predetermined region for calculating the candidate evaluation value described above.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (template matching) between a template in the current picture and a block in the reference picture.
  • the current block is searched by searching the reference picture (Ref0) for the block that most closely matches the block adjacent to the current block (Cur block) in the current picture (Cur Pic).
  • Ref0 the reference picture
  • the reconstructed image of the encoded region of the left adjacent area and / or the upper adjacent area, and the equivalent in the encoded reference picture (Ref0) designated by the candidate MV When a difference from the reconstructed image at the position is derived, an evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value, and a candidate MV having the best evaluation value among a plurality of candidate MVs is selected as the best candidate MV. Good.
  • FRUC flag Information indicating whether or not to apply such FRUC mode
  • FRUC flag information indicating whether or not to apply such FRUC mode
  • the FRUC mode is applied (for example, when the FRUC flag is true)
  • information indicating the pattern matching method (first pattern matching or second pattern matching) (for example, called the FRUC mode flag) is signaled at the CU level. It becomes. Note that the signalization of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be other levels (for example, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, or sub-block level). .
  • BIO bi-directional optical flow
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming constant velocity linear motion.
  • (vx, vy) indicates a velocity vector
  • ⁇ 0 and ⁇ 1 indicate temporal distances between the current picture (Cur Pic) and two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1), respectively.
  • (MVx0, MVy0) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref0
  • (MVx1, MVy1) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref1.
  • This optical flow equation consists of (i) the product of the time derivative of the luminance value, (ii) the horizontal component of the horizontal velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image, and (iii) the vertical velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image. Indicates that the sum of the products of the vertical components of is equal to zero.
  • the block-based motion vector obtained from the merge list or the like is corrected in pixel units.
  • the motion vector may be derived on the decoding device side by a method different from the derivation of the motion vector based on the model assuming constant velocity linear motion.
  • a motion vector may be derived for each subblock based on the motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • This mode may be referred to as an affine motion compensation prediction mode.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram for explaining derivation of motion vectors in units of sub-blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • the current block includes 16 4 ⁇ 4 sub-blocks.
  • the motion vector v0 of the upper left corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent block
  • the motion vector v1 of the upper right corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent subblock.
  • the motion vector (vx, vy) of each sub-block in the current block is derived by the following equation (2).
  • x and y indicate the horizontal position and vertical position of the sub-block, respectively, and w indicates a predetermined weight coefficient.
  • Such an affine motion compensation prediction mode may include several modes in which the motion vector derivation methods of the upper left and upper right corner control points are different.
  • Information indicating such an affine motion compensation prediction mode (for example, called an affine flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the information indicating the affine motion compensation prediction mode need not be limited to the CU level, but other levels (for example, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, or sub-block level). ).
  • the prediction control unit 128 selects either the intra prediction signal or the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the subtraction unit 104 and the addition unit 116 as a prediction signal.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining the outline of the motion vector deriving process in the merge mode.
  • a prediction MV list in which prediction MV candidates are registered is generated.
  • prediction MV candidates spatial adjacent prediction MVs that are MVs of a plurality of encoded blocks located spatially around the encoding target block, and the position of the encoding target block in the encoded reference picture are projected.
  • Temporal adjacent prediction MV that is MV of neighboring blocks combined prediction MV that is MV generated by combining MV values of spatial adjacent prediction MV and temporal adjacent prediction MV, zero prediction MV that is MV having a value of zero, and the like There is.
  • variable length encoding unit describes and encodes merge_idx which is a signal indicating which prediction MV is selected in the stream.
  • the prediction MV registered in the prediction MV list described with reference to FIG. 9B is an example, and the number of prediction MVs may be different from the number in the figure, or may not include some types of prediction MVs in the figure. It may be the composition which added prediction MV other than the kind of prediction MV in a figure.
  • the final MV may be determined by performing DMVR processing, which will be described later, using the MV of the encoding target block derived by the merge mode.
  • FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of DMVR processing.
  • the optimal MVP set in the processing target block is set as a candidate MV, and reference pixels from a first reference picture that is a processed picture in the L0 direction and a second reference picture that is a processed picture in the L1 direction are set according to the candidate MV. Are obtained, and a template is generated by taking the average of each reference pixel.
  • the peripheral areas of the candidate MVs of the first reference picture and the second reference picture are searched, respectively, and the MV with the lowest cost is determined as the final MV.
  • the cost value is calculated using a difference value between each pixel value of the template and each pixel value of the search area, an MV value, and the like.
  • FIG. 9D is a diagram for explaining an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
  • an MV for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a block to be encoded is derived from a reference picture that is an encoded picture.
  • the predicted image for the encoding target block is generated by performing the brightness correction process using the brightness correction parameter for the reference image in the reference picture specified by MV.
  • the shape of the peripheral reference region in FIG. 9D is an example, and other shapes may be used.
  • the process of generating a predicted image from one reference picture has been described, but the same applies to the case of generating a predicted image from a plurality of reference pictures, and the same applies to reference images acquired from each reference picture.
  • the predicted image is generated after performing the luminance correction processing by the method.
  • lic_flag is a signal indicating whether to apply LIC processing.
  • the encoding device it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to an area where the luminance change occurs, and if it belongs to the area where the luminance change occurs, lic_flag is set. Encode by applying LIC processing with a value of 1 set, and if not belonging to an area where a luminance change has occurred, set 0 as lic_flag and perform encoding without applying the LIC processing .
  • the decoding apparatus decodes lic_flag described in the stream, thereby switching whether to apply the LIC processing according to the value, and performing decoding.
  • a method for determining whether or not to apply LIC processing for example, there is a method for determining whether or not LIC processing has been applied to peripheral blocks.
  • the encoding target block is in the merge mode
  • whether or not the surrounding encoded blocks selected in the derivation of the MV in the merge mode processing are encoded by applying the LIC processing. Judgment is performed, and encoding is performed by switching whether to apply the LIC processing according to the result.
  • the decoding process is exactly the same.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of decoding apparatus 200 according to Embodiment 1.
  • the decoding device 200 is a moving image / image decoding device that decodes moving images / images in units of blocks.
  • the decoding device 200 includes an entropy decoding unit 202, an inverse quantization unit 204, an inverse transformation unit 206, an addition unit 208, a block memory 210, a loop filter unit 212, and a frame memory 214. And an intra prediction unit 216, an inter prediction unit 218, and a prediction control unit 220.
  • the decoding device 200 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory.
  • the processor executes the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse transformation unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, and the intra prediction unit. 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 is dedicated to the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse transformation unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220. It may be realized as one or more electronic circuits.
  • the entropy decoding unit 202 performs entropy decoding on the encoded bit stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit 202 performs arithmetic decoding from a coded bitstream to a binary signal, for example. Then, the entropy decoding unit 202 debinarizes the binary signal. As a result, the entropy decoding unit 202 outputs the quantized coefficient to the inverse quantization unit 204 in units of blocks.
  • the inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of a decoding target block (hereinafter referred to as a current block) that is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes each quantization coefficient of the current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the quantization coefficient. Then, the inverse quantization unit 204 outputs the quantization coefficient (that is, the transform coefficient) obtained by inverse quantization of the current block to the inverse transform unit 206.
  • a decoding target block hereinafter referred to as a current block
  • the inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes each quantization coefficient of the current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the quantization coefficient. Then, the inverse quantization unit 204 outputs the quantization coefficient (that is, the transform coefficient) obtained by inverse quantization of the current block to the inverse transform unit 206.
  • the inverse transform unit 206 restores the prediction error by inverse transforming the transform coefficient that is an input from the inverse quantization unit 204.
  • the inverse conversion unit 206 determines the current block based on the information indicating the read conversion type. Inversely transform the conversion coefficient of.
  • the inverse transform unit 206 applies inverse retransformation to the transform coefficient.
  • the adder 208 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error input from the inverse converter 206 and the prediction sample input from the prediction controller 220. Then, the adding unit 208 outputs the reconfigured block to the block memory 210 and the loop filter unit 212.
  • the block memory 210 is a storage unit for storing a block that is referred to in intra prediction and that is within a decoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as a current picture). Specifically, the block memory 210 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 208.
  • the loop filter unit 212 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 208, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 214, the display device, and the like.
  • one filter is selected from the plurality of filters based on the local gradient direction and activity, The selected filter is applied to the reconstruction block.
  • the frame memory 214 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and is sometimes called a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 214 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 212.
  • the intra prediction unit 216 performs intra prediction with reference to the block in the current picture stored in the block memory 210 based on the intra prediction mode read from the encoded bitstream, so that a prediction signal (intra prediction Signal). Specifically, the intra prediction unit 216 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to a sample (for example, luminance value and color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to the unit 220.
  • a prediction signal for example, luminance value and color difference value
  • the intra prediction unit 216 may predict the color difference component of the current block based on the luminance component of the current block.
  • the intra prediction unit 216 corrects the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical direction.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 refers to the reference picture stored in the frame memory 214 and predicts the current block. Prediction is performed in units of a current block or a sub-block (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 block) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 218 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub-block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) read from the encoded bitstream, and generates the inter prediction signal. The result is output to the prediction control unit 220.
  • motion information for example, a motion vector
  • the inter prediction unit 218 When the information read from the encoded bitstream indicates that the OBMC mode is to be applied, the inter prediction unit 218 includes not only the motion information of the current block obtained by motion search but also the motion information of adjacent blocks. To generate an inter prediction signal.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 follows the pattern matching method (bilateral matching or template matching) read from the encoded stream. Motion information is derived by performing motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion compensation using the derived motion information.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 derives a motion vector based on a model assuming constant velocity linear motion. Also, when the information read from the encoded bitstream indicates that the affine motion compensated prediction mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 determines the motion vector in units of subblocks based on the motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. Is derived.
  • the prediction control unit 220 selects either the intra prediction signal or the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the adding unit 208 as a prediction signal.
  • FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating a current block and a referenceable area in the embodiment.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 can perform a process referred to as IBC that refers to a decoded pixel in a current picture that is a picture including the current block 12.
  • the IBC can be used as one of normal inter prediction modes, and can be used together with a merge mode, a normal inter mode, a skip mode, and the like. Therefore, the encoding apparatus 100 can use not only an encoded picture or a picture that has not been encoded, which is close in time order to the encoding target picture, as a reference picture, but can also use IBC. is there.
  • the horizontal size of the current block 12 is Wc. Further, the vertical size of the current block 12 is assumed to be Hc.
  • the referable area 20 which is an area where pixels can be referred to is located on the left side of the current block 12 above the lower side of the current block 12 or above the current block, as shown in FIG. 11A. That is, the referenceable area 20 is an area encoded before the current block 12. This is because pixels that can be referred to by the current block 12 are decoded pixels.
  • the current block 12 is the current block in the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding target block in the decoding apparatus 200.
  • FIG. 11B shows a block vector in the embodiment.
  • a vector representing a displacement of the position between the current block and the reference block in the current picture is called a block vector (BV).
  • the origin of the block vector is, for example, the upper right corner pixel of the current block 12. Further, for example, the origin of the block vector may be the pixel at the upper left corner of the current block 12, the lower right pixel of the current block 12, or the lower left pixel of the current block 12.
  • the block vector is sometimes called a motion vector.
  • the block vector is, for example, a vector connecting the upper right corner pixel of the current block 12 and the upper right corner pixel of the reference block 30.
  • a vector representing the horizontal component of the block vector is BVx
  • a vector representing the vertical component of the block vector is BVy.
  • the block vector may be a vector connecting the pixel at the upper left corner of the current block 12 and the pixel at the upper left corner of the reference block 30.
  • the block vector may be a vector connecting the pixel at the lower right corner of the current block 12 and the pixel at the lower right corner of the reference block 30.
  • the block vector may be a vector connecting the pixel at the lower left corner of the current block 12 and the pixel at the lower left corner of the reference block 30.
  • FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a case where the horizontal component of the block vector in the embodiment is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block.
  • FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating a case where the vertical component of the block vector in the embodiment is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction.
  • the positive direction of the block vector in the vertical direction is defined as the upward direction.
  • the horizontal positive direction of the block vector is the left direction.
  • Case 1 indicates that if the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size Wc of the current block 12, the vertical component BVy of the block vector is larger than the vertical size Hc of the current block 12. .
  • the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is less than or equal to the horizontal size Wc of the current block 12
  • the encoding apparatus 100 does not encode the value of BVy as it is, but encodes BVy ′ that is a value obtained by subtracting the offset value Hc from BVy. By subtracting the offset value from BVy, BVy ′ requires fewer bits to represent each component than BVy. Thereby, the encoding apparatus 100 can reduce the amount of codes.
  • Case 2 indicates that if the vertical component BVy of the block vector is smaller than the vertical size Hc of the current block 12, the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is larger than the horizontal size Wc of the current block 12.
  • BVx ′ BVx ⁇ Wc. .
  • the encoding apparatus 100 does not encode the value of BVx as it is, but encodes BVx ′ that is a value obtained by subtracting the offset value Wc from BVx. By subtracting the offset value from BVx, BVx ′ requires fewer bits to represent each component than BVx. Thereby, the encoding apparatus 100 can reduce the amount of codes.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 can acquire BVx by adding Wc that is an offset value to BVx ′.
  • a prediction vector may be generated from a block vector in a block encoded in the IBC mode around the current block 12, and a difference value between the prediction vector and the block vector in the current block 12 may be encoded.
  • the difference value between the block vector in the adjacent block and the block vector in the current block 12 is encoded.
  • a value obtained by subtracting the horizontal or vertical size of the current block 12 as an offset value from each component of the block vector in the current block 12 when there is no block encoded in the IBC mode in the adjacent block of the current block 12 Is encoded.
  • a value expressing each component of the block vector in the current block 12 by an offset value may be encoded.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 can reduce the number of bits necessary for expressing each component of the block vector. Therefore, the encoding apparatus 100 may be able to reduce the code amount in the encoding process.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of an encoding apparatus that performs encoding in the IBC mode in the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 determines whether or not to encode the current block 12 in the IBC mode (step S1000).
  • the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the current block 12 is not encoded in the IBC mode (No in step S1000), the encoding apparatus 100 ends the operation.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the current block 12 is to be encoded in the IBC mode (Yes in step S1000), the encoding apparatus 100 encodes information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector (step S100).
  • the first direction may be a horizontal direction or a vertical direction.
  • the information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector may be a component in the first direction of the block vector.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector satisfies a predetermined condition (step S1002).
  • the predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block 12 exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area 20. That is, the case where the reference block 30 exists below the referenceable area 20 in the IBC can be excluded.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 determines from the component in the second direction of the block vector.
  • the value obtained by subtracting the offset value is encoded as information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector (step S1003).
  • the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the offset value may be a value indicating the size of the current block 12 in the second direction.
  • the offset value may be a predetermined value.
  • encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector does not satisfy the predetermined condition (No in step S1002), encoding apparatus 100 determines that the component in the second direction of the block vector. Is encoded (step S1004).
  • the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector may be a component in the second direction of the block vector.
  • the encoding device 100 ends the operation.
  • the first direction is the horizontal direction of the block vector.
  • the first direction is the vertical direction of the block vector.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 uses a value obtained by subtracting the offset value from the vertical component of the block vector according to the horizontal component value of the block vector. It is determined whether to use as information indicating the component. When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is used as the vertical component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 subtracts the offset value from the vertical component of the block vector. Encode the value. When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is not used as the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 does not consider the offset value.
  • the vertical component of the block vector is encoded. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 encodes the vertical component of the block vector without subtracting the offset value from the vertical component of the block vector.
  • the offset value may be the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction.
  • the offset value may be a predetermined value.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 uses a value obtained by subtracting the offset value from the horizontal component of the block vector according to the value of the vertical component of the block vector. It is determined whether or not it is used as information indicating the horizontal component.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector is used as information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 subtracts the offset value from the horizontal component of the block vector. The resulting value is encoded.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector is not used as information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 does not consider the offset value and blocks Encode the horizontal component of the vector. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 encodes the horizontal component of the block vector without subtracting the offset value from the horizontal component of the block vector.
  • the offset value may be the horizontal size of the current block 12.
  • the offset value may be a predetermined value.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of a decoding device that decodes a bitstream encoded by the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines whether or not the current block 12 is encoded in the IBC mode (step S2000).
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the current block 12 is not encoded in the IBC mode (No in step S2000), the decoding apparatus 200 ends the operation.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the current block 12 is encoded in the IBC mode (Yes in step S2000), the decoding apparatus 200 decodes information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector.
  • the first direction may be a horizontal direction or a vertical direction.
  • the information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector may be a component in the first direction of the block vector, or may be a value obtained by processing the component in the first direction of the block vector. .
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines whether or not the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector satisfies a predetermined condition (step S2002).
  • the predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block 12 exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area. That is, it is possible to eliminate the case where the reference block exists below the referenceable area in the IBC.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector satisfies the predetermined condition (Yes in step S2002), the decoding apparatus 200 indicates information indicating the component of the block vector in the second direction.
  • the offset value is added to the decoded value.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 decodes a value obtained by adding the offset value to a value obtained by decoding the information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector as information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector ( Step S2003). That is, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector by adding the offset value to a value obtained by decoding the information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector.
  • the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the offset value may be a value indicating the size of the current block 12 in the second direction.
  • the offset value may be a predetermined value.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector does not satisfy the predetermined condition (No in step S2002), the decoding apparatus 200 indicates the component of the block vector in the second direction.
  • the information is decrypted (step S2004).
  • the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector may be a component in the second direction of the block vector.
  • the decoding device 200 ends the operation.
  • the first direction is the horizontal direction of the block vector.
  • the first direction is the vertical direction of the block vector.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 uses a value obtained by adding an offset value to the vertical component of the block vector according to the horizontal component value of the block vector. It is determined whether or not the information is to be decoded.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is decoded as the vertical component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 adds the offset value to the vertical component of the block vector, Decodes the vertical component of the block vector.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is not decoded as the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 does not consider the offset value, Decodes the vertical component of the block vector. That is, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes the vertical component of the block vector without adding the offset value to the vertical component of the block vector.
  • the offset value may be the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction.
  • the offset value may be a predetermined value.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 uses a value obtained by adding an offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector according to the value of the vertical component of the block vector. It is determined whether to decode the information indicating the horizontal component.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector is decoded as the horizontal component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 adds the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector, Decode the horizontal component of the block vector.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector is not decoded as the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 does not consider the offset value, Decode the horizontal component of the block vector. That is, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes the horizontal component of the block vector without adding the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector.
  • the offset value may be the horizontal size of the current block 12.
  • the offset value may be a predetermined value.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the loop filter consideration restriction in the embodiment.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 applies a loop filter such as a deblocking filter to the current block 12 in units of blocks, it performs a loop filter consideration restriction.
  • the loop filter consideration restriction is to exclude peripheral pixels of the current block 12 used in the loop filter processing from the referenceable area 20. This ensures that the pixel value after applying the loop filter is used as a reference pixel in encoding in the IBC mode.
  • the loop filter is also called an in-loop filter.
  • the lower pixel of the referenceable area 20 is an area to which the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, it is impossible to refer to the pixels below the referable region 20.
  • the area adjacent to the vertical side of the current block 12 in the pixel area on the right side of the referenceable area 20 Is a region where the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, in the pixel area on the right side of the referable area 20, the pixels in the area adjacent to the side in the vertical direction of the current block 12 cannot be referred to.
  • the region 40 excluded from the referenceable region is, for example, the region illustrated in FIG.
  • the processing described above is the same in the decoding device 200.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 applies a loop filter such as a deblocking filter to the current block 12 in units of blocks, it performs a loop filter consideration restriction.
  • the loop filter consideration restriction is to exclude peripheral pixels of the current block 12 used in the loop filter processing from the referenceable area. This ensures that the pixel value after application of the loop filter is used as the reference pixel in decoding in the IBC mode.
  • the loop filter is also called an in-loop filter.
  • the lower pixel of the referenceable area becomes an area to which the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, it is impossible to refer to the pixel below the referable area.
  • the pixel on the right side of the referenceable area is an area to which the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, the pixel on the right side of the referenceable area is not referred to.
  • the region 40 excluded from the referenceable region is, for example, the region illustrated in FIG.
  • information regarding whether or not to enable application of the loop filter in the IBC mode may be determined based on information decoded from header information such as SPS.
  • the loop filter consideration restriction when the application of the loop filter is effective, the loop filter consideration restriction may be enabled. On the other hand, when the application of the loop filter is invalid, the loop filter consideration restriction may be invalidated.
  • the loop filter consideration restriction may be effective.
  • IBC intra prediction part of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 performs IBC.
  • the offset values described in FIGS. 12A to 14 are not limited to those described above.
  • the offset value for encoding BVy is Hc and the offset value for encoding BVx is Wc
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and other values may be used.
  • a value obtained by adding the height A of the region 40 excluded from the referenceable region in FIG. 15 to Hc, or a value obtained by adding the width B of the region 40 excluded from the referenceable region in FIG. It may be used as an offset value.
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the encoding device according to the embodiment.
  • the encoding device 100 includes a circuit 150 and a memory 152.
  • a plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 are implemented by the circuit 150 and the memory 152 illustrated in FIG.
  • the circuit 150 is an electronic circuit that can access the memory 152 and performs information processing.
  • the circuit 150 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that encodes a moving image using the memory 152.
  • the circuit 150 may be a processor such as a CPU.
  • the circuit 150 may be an aggregate of a plurality of electronic circuits.
  • the circuit 150 may serve as a plurality of constituent elements excluding a constituent element for storing information among a plurality of constituent elements of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. That is, the circuit 150 may perform the operation described above as the operation of these components.
  • the memory 152 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 150 to encode a moving image is stored.
  • the memory 152 may be an electronic circuit, may be connected to the circuit 150, or may be included in the circuit 150.
  • the memory 152 may be an aggregate of a plurality of electronic circuits or may be configured by a plurality of sub memories. Further, the memory 152 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 152 may be a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
  • the memory 152 may serve as a component for storing information among a plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG.
  • the memory 152 may store a moving image to be encoded, or may store a bit string corresponding to the encoded moving image.
  • the memory 152 may store a program for the circuit 150 to encode a moving image.
  • not all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 may be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be executed by another device. Then, in the encoding device 100, a part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 is mounted, and a part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, so that it relates to the encoding of the moving image. Information can be set appropriately.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an operation example of the encoding apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 illustrated in FIG. 16 performs the operation illustrated in FIG. 17 when performing the encoding using IBC in the inter prediction unit.
  • the circuit 150 performs the following operation using the memory 152.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 encodes the block vector using a value obtained by subtracting the size of the current block 12 in the first direction from the first component of the block vector (step S3000).
  • the first direction is one of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the first component of the block vector is a component in the first direction of the block vector.
  • the encoding device 100 ends the operation.
  • the predetermined condition in step S3000 may be that the second component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the second direction.
  • the predetermined condition in step S3000 may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area 20. That is, the case where the reference block 30 exists below the referenceable area 20 in the IBC can be excluded.
  • the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the second component of the block vector is a component in the second direction of the block vector.
  • FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment.
  • the decoding device 200 includes a circuit 250 and a memory 252.
  • a plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 are implemented by the circuit 250 and the memory 252 illustrated in FIG.
  • the circuit 250 is an electronic circuit that can access the memory 252 and performs information processing.
  • the circuit 250 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that decodes a moving image using the memory 252.
  • the circuit 250 may be a processor such as a CPU.
  • the circuit 250 may be an assembly of a plurality of electronic circuits.
  • the circuit 250 may serve as a plurality of constituent elements excluding a constituent element for storing information among a plurality of constituent elements of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. That is, the circuit 250 may perform the operation described above as the operation of these components.
  • the memory 252 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 250 to decode a moving image is stored.
  • the memory 252 may be an electronic circuit, may be connected to the circuit 250, or may be included in the circuit 250.
  • the memory 252 may be an aggregate of a plurality of electronic circuits or may be configured by a plurality of sub memories. Further, the memory 252 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 252 may be a nonvolatile memory or a volatile memory.
  • the memory 252 may serve as a component for storing information among a plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG.
  • the memory 252 may store a bit string corresponding to the decoded moving image, or may store the decoded moving image.
  • the memory 252 may store a program for the circuit 250 to decode a moving image.
  • all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 may not be implemented, and all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components illustrated in FIG. 10 may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the decoding device 200, a part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 is implemented, and a part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, so that information related to the decoding of the moving image is obtained. It can be set appropriately.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 illustrated in FIG. 18 performs the operation illustrated in FIG. 19 when performing decoding using IBC in the inter prediction unit.
  • the circuit 250 performs the following operation using the memory 252.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 uses a value obtained by adding the size in the first direction of the current block 12 to a value obtained by decoding information indicating the first component of the block vector.
  • the block vector is decoded (step S4000).
  • the first direction is one of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the first component of the block vector is a component in the first direction of the block vector.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 ends the operation.
  • the predetermined condition in step S4000 may be that the second component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the second direction.
  • the predetermined condition in step S4000 may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block 12 exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area. That is, it is possible to eliminate the case where the reference block exists below the referenceable area in the IBC.
  • the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • the second component of the block vector is a component in the second direction of the block vector.
  • the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 in the present embodiment may be used as an image encoding device and an image decoding device, respectively, or may be used as a moving image encoding device and a moving image decoding device, respectively.
  • each component may be configured by dedicated hardware or may be realized by executing a software program suitable for each component.
  • Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
  • each of the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 includes a processing circuit (Processing Circuit) and a storage device (Storage) electrically connected to the processing circuit and accessible from the processing circuit. You may have.
  • the processing circuit corresponds to the circuit 150 or 250
  • the storage device corresponds to the memory 152 or 252.
  • the processing circuit includes at least one of dedicated hardware and a program execution unit, and executes processing using a storage device. Further, when the processing circuit includes a program execution unit, the storage device stores a software program executed by the program execution unit.
  • the software that realizes the encoding apparatus 100 or the decoding apparatus 200 of the present embodiment is the following program.
  • this program encodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position between a prediction block composed of encoded pixels in a screen and an encoding target block on a computer.
  • a block vector indicating a displacement of a position between a prediction block composed of encoded pixels in a screen and an encoding target block on a computer.
  • An encoding method for encoding the block vector using a value obtained by subtracting the size of the direction may be executed.
  • the program decodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position of a prediction block and a decoding target block configured by pixels of a decoded block in the screen, and a predetermined condition in decoding the block vector.
  • the size of the decoding target block in the first direction is added to the value obtained by decoding the information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
  • a decoding method for decoding the block vector may be executed.
  • each component may be a circuit as described above. These circuits may constitute one circuit as a whole, or may be separate circuits. Each component may be realized by a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor.
  • the encoding / decoding device may include the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200.
  • ordinal numbers such as the first and second used in the description may be appropriately replaced.
  • an ordinal number may be newly given to a component or the like, or may be removed.
  • the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 was demonstrated based on embodiment, the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 is not limited to this embodiment. As long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present disclosure, the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 may be configured in which various modifications conceived by those skilled in the art have been made in the present embodiment, or in a form constructed by combining components in different embodiments. It may be included within the scope of the embodiment.
  • This aspect may be implemented in combination with at least a part of other aspects in the present disclosure.
  • a part of the processing, a part of the configuration of the apparatus, a part of the syntax, and the like described in the flowchart of this aspect may be implemented in combination with another aspect.
  • each of the functional blocks can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, and the like. Further, the processing by each functional block is usually realized by a program execution unit such as a processor reading and executing software (program) recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. The software may be distributed by downloading or the like, or may be distributed by being recorded on a recording medium such as a semiconductor memory. Naturally, each functional block can be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
  • each embodiment may be realized by centralized processing using a single device (system), or may be realized by distributed processing using a plurality of devices. Good.
  • the number of processors that execute the program may be one or more. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
  • the system includes an image encoding device using an image encoding method, an image decoding device using an image decoding method, and an image encoding / decoding device including both.
  • Other configurations in the system can be appropriately changed according to circumstances.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an overall configuration of a content supply system ex100 that implements a content distribution service.
  • the communication service providing area is divided into desired sizes, and base stations ex106, ex107, ex108, ex109, and ex110, which are fixed wireless stations, are installed in each cell.
  • devices such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101, the Internet service provider ex102 or the communication network ex104, and the base stations ex106 to ex110.
  • the content supply system ex100 may be connected by combining any of the above elements.
  • Each device may be directly or indirectly connected to each other via a telephone network or a short-range wireless communication without using the base stations ex106 to ex110 which are fixed wireless stations.
  • the streaming server ex103 is connected to each device such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101.
  • the streaming server ex103 is connected to a terminal in a hot spot in the airplane ex117 via the satellite ex116.
  • the streaming server ex103 may be directly connected to the communication network ex104 without going through the Internet ex101 or the Internet service provider ex102, or may be directly connected to the airplane ex117 without going through the satellite ex116.
  • the camera ex113 is a device that can shoot still images and moving images such as a digital camera.
  • the smartphone ex115 is a smartphone, a cellular phone, or a PHS (Personal Handyphone System) that is compatible with a mobile communication system generally called 2G, 3G, 3.9G, 4G, and 5G in the future.
  • a mobile communication system generally called 2G, 3G, 3.9G, 4G, and 5G in the future.
  • the home appliance ex118 is a device included in a refrigerator or a household fuel cell cogeneration system.
  • a terminal having a photographing function is connected to the streaming server ex103 through the base station ex106 or the like, thereby enabling live distribution or the like.
  • the terminal (computer ex111, game machine ex112, camera ex113, home appliance ex114, smartphone ex115, terminal in airplane ex117, etc.) is used for the still image or video content captured by the user using the terminal.
  • the encoding process described in each embodiment is performed, and the video data obtained by the encoding and the sound data obtained by encoding the sound corresponding to the video are multiplexed, and the obtained data is transmitted to the streaming server ex103. That is, each terminal functions as an image encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
  • the streaming server ex103 streams the content data transmitted to the requested client.
  • the client is a computer or the like in the computer ex111, the game machine ex112, the camera ex113, the home appliance ex114, the smart phone ex115, or the airplane ex117 that can decode the encoded data.
  • Each device that has received the distributed data decrypts and reproduces the received data. That is, each device functions as an image decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
  • the streaming server ex103 may be a plurality of servers or a plurality of computers, and may process, record, and distribute data in a distributed manner.
  • the streaming server ex103 may be realized by a CDN (Contents Delivery Network), and content distribution may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers and edge servers distributed all over the world.
  • CDN Contents Delivery Network
  • edge servers that are physically close to each other are dynamically allocated according to clients. Then, the content can be cached and distributed to the edge server, thereby reducing the delay.
  • the processing is distributed among multiple edge servers, the distribution subject is switched to another edge server, or the part of the network where the failure has occurred Since detouring can be continued, high-speed and stable distribution can be realized.
  • the captured data may be encoded at each terminal, may be performed on the server side, or may be shared with each other.
  • a processing loop is performed twice.
  • the first loop the complexity of the image or the code amount in units of frames or scenes is detected.
  • the second loop processing for maintaining the image quality and improving the coding efficiency is performed.
  • the terminal performs the first encoding process
  • the server receiving the content performs the second encoding process, thereby improving the quality and efficiency of the content while reducing the processing load on each terminal. it can.
  • the encoded data of the first time performed by the terminal can be received and reproduced by another terminal, enabling more flexible real-time distribution.
  • the camera ex113 or the like extracts a feature amount from an image, compresses data relating to the feature amount as metadata, and transmits the metadata to the server.
  • the server performs compression according to the meaning of the image, for example, by determining the importance of the object from the feature amount and switching the quantization accuracy.
  • the feature data is particularly effective for improving the accuracy and efficiency of motion vector prediction at the time of re-compression on the server.
  • simple coding such as VLC (variable length coding) may be performed at the terminal, and coding with a large processing load such as CABAC (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding) may be performed at the server.
  • a plurality of video data in which almost the same scene is captured by a plurality of terminals.
  • a GOP Group of Picture
  • a picture unit or a tile obtained by dividing a picture using a plurality of terminals that have performed shooting and other terminals and servers that have not performed shooting as necessary.
  • Distributed processing is performed by assigning encoding processing in units or the like. Thereby, delay can be reduced and real-time property can be realized.
  • the server may manage and / or instruct the video data captured by each terminal to refer to each other.
  • the encoded data from each terminal may be received by the server and the reference relationship may be changed among a plurality of data, or the picture itself may be corrected or replaced to be encoded again. This makes it possible to generate a stream with improved quality and efficiency of each piece of data.
  • the server may distribute the video data after performing transcoding to change the encoding method of the video data.
  • the server may convert the MPEG encoding system to the VP encoding. 264. It may be converted into H.265.
  • the encoding process can be performed by a terminal or one or more servers. Therefore, in the following, description such as “server” or “terminal” is used as the subject performing processing, but part or all of processing performed by the server may be performed by the terminal, or processing performed by the terminal may be performed. Some or all may be performed at the server. The same applies to the decoding process.
  • the server not only encodes a two-dimensional moving image, but also encodes a still image automatically based on a scene analysis of the moving image or at a time specified by the user and transmits it to the receiving terminal. Also good.
  • the server can acquire the relative positional relationship between the photographing terminals, the server obtains the three-dimensional shape of the scene based on not only the two-dimensional moving image but also the video obtained by photographing the same scene from different angles. Can be generated.
  • the server may separately encode the three-dimensional data generated by the point cloud or the like, and the video to be transmitted to the receiving terminal based on the result of recognizing or tracking the person or the object using the three-dimensional data.
  • the images may be selected or reconstructed from videos captured by a plurality of terminals.
  • the user can arbitrarily select each video corresponding to each photographing terminal and enjoy a scene, or can display a video of an arbitrary viewpoint from three-dimensional data reconstructed using a plurality of images or videos. You can also enjoy the clipped content.
  • sound is collected from a plurality of different angles, and the server may multiplex and transmit sound from a specific angle or space according to the video.
  • the server may create viewpoint images for the right eye and the left eye, respectively, and perform encoding that allows reference between the viewpoint videos by Multi-View Coding (MVC) or the like. You may encode as another stream, without referring. At the time of decoding another stream, it is preferable to reproduce in synchronization with each other so that a virtual three-dimensional space is reproduced according to the viewpoint of the user.
  • MVC Multi-View Coding
  • the server superimposes virtual object information in the virtual space on the camera information in the real space based on the three-dimensional position or the movement of the user's viewpoint.
  • the decoding device may acquire or hold virtual object information and three-dimensional data, generate a two-dimensional image according to the movement of the user's viewpoint, and create superimposition data by connecting them smoothly.
  • the decoding device transmits the movement of the user's viewpoint to the server in addition to the request for the virtual object information, and the server creates superimposition data according to the movement of the viewpoint received from the three-dimensional data held in the server,
  • the superimposed data may be encoded and distributed to the decoding device.
  • the superimposed data has an ⁇ value indicating transparency in addition to RGB
  • the server sets the ⁇ value of a portion other than the object created from the three-dimensional data to 0 or the like, and the portion is transparent. May be encoded.
  • the server may generate data in which a RGB value of a predetermined value is set as the background, such as a chroma key, and the portion other than the object is set to the background color.
  • the decryption processing of the distributed data may be performed at each terminal as a client, may be performed on the server side, or may be performed in a shared manner.
  • a terminal may once send a reception request to the server, receive content corresponding to the request at another terminal, perform a decoding process, and transmit a decoded signal to a device having a display.
  • a part of a region such as a tile in which a picture is divided may be decoded and displayed on a viewer's personal terminal while receiving large-size image data on a TV or the like. Accordingly, it is possible to confirm at hand the area in which the person is responsible or the area to be confirmed in more detail while sharing the whole image.
  • access to encoded data on the network such as when the encoded data is cached in a server that can be accessed from the receiving terminal in a short time, or copied to the edge server in the content delivery service. It is also possible to switch the bit rate of received data based on ease.
  • the content switching will be described using a scalable stream that is compression-encoded by applying the moving image encoding method shown in each of the above embodiments shown in FIG.
  • the server may have a plurality of streams of the same content and different quality as individual streams, but the temporal / spatial scalable implementation realized by dividing into layers as shown in the figure.
  • the configuration may be such that the content is switched by utilizing the characteristics of the stream.
  • the decoding side decides which layer to decode according to internal factors such as performance and external factors such as the state of communication bandwidth, so that the decoding side can combine low-resolution content and high-resolution content. You can switch freely and decrypt. For example, when the user wants to continue watching the video that was viewed on the smartphone ex115 while moving on a device such as an Internet TV after returning home, the device only has to decode the same stream to a different layer, so the load on the server side Can be reduced.
  • the enhancement layer includes meta information based on image statistical information, etc., in addition to the configuration in which the picture is encoded for each layer and the enhancement layer exists above the base layer.
  • the decoding side may generate content with high image quality by super-resolution of the base layer picture based on the meta information.
  • Super-resolution may be either improvement of the SN ratio at the same resolution or enlargement of the resolution.
  • the meta information includes information for specifying a linear or non-linear filter coefficient used for super-resolution processing, or information for specifying a parameter value in filter processing, machine learning, or least square calculation used for super-resolution processing. .
  • the picture may be divided into tiles or the like according to the meaning of the object in the image, and the decoding side may select only a part of the region by selecting the tile to be decoded.
  • the decoding side can determine the position of the desired object based on the meta information Can be identified and the tile containing the object can be determined.
  • the meta information is stored using a data storage structure different from the pixel data such as the SEI message in HEVC. This meta information indicates, for example, the position, size, or color of the main object.
  • meta information may be stored in units composed of a plurality of pictures, such as streams, sequences, or random access units.
  • the decoding side can acquire the time when the specific person appears in the video, etc., and can match the picture in which the object exists and the position of the object in the picture by combining with the information in units of pictures.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a web page display screen on the computer ex111 or the like.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a display screen example of a web page on the smartphone ex115 or the like.
  • the web page may include a plurality of link images that are links to the image content, and the appearance differs depending on the browsing device. When a plurality of link images are visible on the screen, the display device until the user explicitly selects the link image, or until the link image approaches the center of the screen or the entire link image enters the screen.
  • the (decoding device) displays a still image or an I picture included in each content as a link image, displays a video like a gif animation with a plurality of still images or I pictures, or receives only a base layer to receive a video. Are decoded and displayed.
  • the display device When the link image is selected by the user, the display device decodes the base layer with the highest priority. If there is information indicating that the HTML constituting the web page is scalable content, the display device may decode up to the enhancement layer. Also, in order to ensure real-time properties, the display device only decodes forward reference pictures (I picture, P picture, forward reference only B picture) before being selected or when the communication bandwidth is very strict. In addition, the delay between the decoding time of the first picture and the display time (delay from the start of content decoding to the start of display) can be reduced by displaying. Further, the display device may intentionally ignore the reference relationship of pictures and roughly decode all B pictures and P pictures with forward reference, and perform normal decoding as the number of received pictures increases over time.
  • forward reference pictures I picture, P picture, forward reference only B picture
  • the receiving terminal when transmitting and receiving still image or video data such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional map information for automatic driving or driving support of a car, the receiving terminal adds meta data to image data belonging to one or more layers. Weather or construction information may also be received and decoded in association with each other. The meta information may belong to a layer or may be simply multiplexed with image data.
  • the receiving terminal since the car, drone, airplane, or the like including the receiving terminal moves, the receiving terminal transmits the position information of the receiving terminal at the time of the reception request, thereby seamless reception and decoding while switching the base stations ex106 to ex110. Can be realized.
  • the receiving terminal can dynamically switch how much meta-information is received or how much map information is updated according to the user's selection, the user's situation, or the communication band state. become.
  • the encoded information transmitted by the user can be received, decoded and reproduced in real time by the client.
  • the content supply system ex100 can perform not only high-quality and long-time content by a video distributor but also unicast or multicast distribution of low-quality and short-time content by an individual. Moreover, such personal contents are expected to increase in the future.
  • the server may perform the encoding process after performing the editing process. This can be realized, for example, with the following configuration.
  • the server After shooting, the server performs recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, semantic analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data. Then, the server manually or automatically corrects out-of-focus or camera shake based on the recognition result, or selects a less important scene such as a scene whose brightness is lower than that of other pictures or is out of focus. Edit such as deleting, emphasizing the edge of an object, and changing the hue.
  • the server encodes the edited data based on the editing result. It is also known that if the shooting time is too long, the audience rating will decrease, and the server will move not only in the less important scenes as described above, but also in motion according to the shooting time. A scene with few images may be automatically clipped based on the image processing result. Alternatively, the server may generate and encode a digest based on the result of the semantic analysis of the scene.
  • the server may change and encode the face of the person in the periphery of the screen or the inside of the house into an unfocused image.
  • the server recognizes whether or not a face of a person different from the person registered in advance is shown in the encoding target image, and if so, performs processing such as applying a mosaic to the face part. May be.
  • the user designates a person or background area that the user wants to process an image from the viewpoint of copyright, etc., and the server replaces the designated area with another video or blurs the focus. It is also possible to perform such processing. If it is a person, the face image can be replaced while tracking the person in the moving image.
  • the decoding device first receives the base layer with the highest priority and performs decoding and reproduction, depending on the bandwidth.
  • the decoding device may receive the enhancement layer during this time, and may play back high-quality video including the enhancement layer when played back twice or more, such as when playback is looped.
  • a stream that is scalable in this way can provide an experience in which the stream becomes smarter and the image is improved gradually, although it is a rough moving picture when it is not selected or at the beginning of viewing.
  • the same experience can be provided even if the coarse stream played back the first time and the second stream coded with reference to the first video are configured as one stream. .
  • these encoding or decoding processes are generally processed in the LSI ex500 included in each terminal.
  • the LSI ex500 may be configured as a single chip or a plurality of chips.
  • moving image encoding or decoding software is incorporated into some recording medium (CD-ROM, flexible disk, hard disk, etc.) that can be read by the computer ex111 and the like, and encoding or decoding processing is performed using the software. Also good.
  • moving image data acquired by the camera may be transmitted. The moving image data at this time is data encoded by the LSI ex500 included in the smartphone ex115.
  • the LSI ex500 may be configured to download and activate application software.
  • the terminal first determines whether the terminal is compatible with the content encoding method or has a specific service execution capability. If the terminal does not support the content encoding method or does not have the capability to execute a specific service, the terminal downloads a codec or application software, and then acquires and reproduces the content.
  • the content supply system ex100 via the Internet ex101, but also a digital broadcasting system, at least the moving image encoding device (image encoding device) or the moving image decoding device (image decoding device) of the above embodiments. Any of these can be incorporated.
  • the unicasting of the content supply system ex100 is suitable for multicasting because it uses a satellite or the like to transmit and receive multiplexed data in which video and sound are multiplexed on broadcasting radio waves.
  • the same application is possible for the encoding process and the decoding process.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating the smartphone ex115.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the smartphone ex115.
  • the smartphone ex115 receives the antenna ex450 for transmitting and receiving radio waves to and from the base station ex110, the camera unit ex465 capable of taking video and still images, the video captured by the camera unit ex465, and the antenna ex450.
  • a display unit ex458 for displaying data obtained by decoding the video or the like.
  • the smartphone ex115 further includes an operation unit ex466 that is a touch panel or the like, a voice output unit ex457 that is a speaker or the like for outputting voice or sound, a voice input unit ex456 that is a microphone or the like for inputting voice, Memory unit ex467 that can store encoded video or still image, recorded audio, received video or still image, encoded data such as mail, or decoded data, and a user, and network A slot part ex464, which is an interface part with the SIMex 468 for authenticating access to various data.
  • An external memory may be used instead of the memory unit ex467.
  • a main control unit ex460 that comprehensively controls the display unit ex458, the operation unit ex466, and the like, a power supply circuit unit ex461, an operation input control unit ex462, a video signal processing unit ex455, a camera interface unit ex463, a display control unit ex459, a modulation / Demodulation unit ex452, multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453, audio signal processing unit ex454, slot unit ex464, and memory unit ex467 are connected via bus ex470.
  • the power supply circuit unit ex461 starts up the smartphone ex115 in an operable state by supplying power from the battery pack to each unit.
  • the smartphone ex115 performs processing such as calling and data communication based on the control of the main control unit ex460 having a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
  • the voice signal picked up by the voice input unit ex456 is converted into a digital voice signal by the voice signal processing unit ex454, spread spectrum processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and digital / analog conversion is performed by the transmission / reception unit ex451.
  • the data is transmitted via the antenna ex450.
  • the received data is amplified and subjected to frequency conversion processing and analog-digital conversion processing, spectrum despreading processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and converted to analog audio signal by the audio signal processing unit ex454, and then this is output to the audio output unit ex457.
  • text, still image, or video data is sent to the main control unit ex460 via the operation input control unit ex462 by the operation of the operation unit ex466 of the main body unit, and transmission / reception processing is performed similarly.
  • the video signal processing unit ex455 uses the video signal stored in the memory unit ex467 or the video signal input from the camera unit ex465 as described above.
  • the video data is compressed and encoded by the moving image encoding method shown in the form, and the encoded video data is sent to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453.
  • the audio signal processing unit ex454 encodes the audio signal picked up by the audio input unit ex456 while the camera unit ex465 captures a video or a still image, and sends the encoded audio data to the multiplexing / separating unit ex453. To do.
  • the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes the encoded video data and the encoded audio data by a predetermined method, and the modulation / demodulation unit (modulation / demodulation circuit unit) ex452 and the modulation / demodulation unit ex451 perform modulation processing and conversion.
  • the data is processed and transmitted via the antenna ex450.
  • the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 performs multiplexing By separating the data, the multiplexed data is divided into a bit stream of video data and a bit stream of audio data, and the encoded video data is supplied to the video signal processing unit ex455 via the synchronization bus ex470. The converted audio data is supplied to the audio signal processing unit ex454.
  • the video signal processing unit ex455 decodes the video signal by the video decoding method corresponding to the video encoding method shown in each of the above embodiments, and is linked from the display unit ex458 via the display control unit ex459.
  • a video or still image included in the moving image file is displayed.
  • the audio signal processing unit ex454 decodes the audio signal, and the audio is output from the audio output unit ex457. Since real-time streaming is widespread, depending on the user's situation, there may be occasions where audio playback is not socially appropriate. Therefore, it is desirable that the initial value is a configuration in which only the video data is reproduced without reproducing the audio signal. Audio may be synchronized and played back only when the user performs an operation such as clicking on video data.
  • the smartphone ex115 has been described here as an example, in addition to a transmission / reception terminal having both an encoder and a decoder as a terminal, a transmission terminal having only an encoder and a reception having only a decoder There are three possible mounting formats: terminals.
  • terminals In the digital broadcasting system, it has been described as receiving or transmitting multiplexed data in which audio data or the like is multiplexed with video data.
  • multiplexed data includes character data related to video in addition to audio data. Multiplexing may be performed, and video data itself may be received or transmitted instead of multiplexed data.
  • the terminal often includes a GPU. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which a wide area is processed in a lump by utilizing the performance of the GPU by using a memory shared by the CPU and the GPU or a memory whose addresses are managed so as to be used in common. As a result, the encoding time can be shortened, real-time performance can be ensured, and low delay can be realized. In particular, it is efficient to perform motion search, deblocking filter, SAO (Sample Adaptive Offset), and transformation / quantization processing in batches in units of pictures or the like instead of the CPU.
  • SAO Sample Adaptive Offset
  • the present disclosure can be used for, for example, a television receiver, a digital video recorder, a car navigation, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a digital video camera, a video conference system, or an electronic mirror.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

An encoding device (100) is provided with a circuit (150) and a memory (152). The circuit (150) encodes, using the memory (152), a block vector that indicates the displacement of position of a to-be-encoded block and a prediction block in a screen image, the prediction block being configured from encoded pixels. When a prescribed condition is satisfied in encoding the block vector, the circuit (150) encodes the block vector by using a value derived by subtracting the size in a first direction of the to-be-encoded block from a first component of the block vector as information indicating the first component of the block vector.

Description

符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法および復号方法Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
 本開示は、複数のピクチャを含む動画像を符号化する符号化装置等に関する。 The present disclosure relates to an encoding device that encodes a moving image including a plurality of pictures.
 従来、動画像を符号化するための規格として、HEVC(High Efficiency Video Coding)とも呼ばれるH.265が存在する(非特許文献1)。 Conventionally, as a standard for encoding moving images, H.C. also called HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding). H.265 exists (Non-Patent Document 1).
 しかしながら、インター予測部において、イントラ・ブロック・コピー(IBC:Intra Block Copy)を行う際に、符号量が多いという課題があった。 However, there has been a problem that the amount of code is large when performing intra block copy (IBC) in the inter prediction unit.
 そこで、本開示は、インター予測部において、IBCを行う際に、従来よりも符号量を削減することができる符号化装置等を提供する。 Therefore, the present disclosure provides an encoding device or the like that can reduce the amount of codes compared to the conventional one when performing IBC in an inter prediction unit.
 本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、画面内の符号化済みの画素から構成される予測ブロックと符号化対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを符号化し、前記ブロックベクトルの符号化において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報として、前記ブロックベクトルの前記第1成分から前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、前記ブロックベクトルを符号化する。 An encoding apparatus according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to generate a prediction block and an encoding target block that are configured from encoded pixels in a screen. When the block vector indicating the displacement of the position is encoded and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the encoding of the block vector, the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is As the information to indicate, the block vector is encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size of the block to be encoded in the first direction from the first component of the block vector.
 なお、これらの包括的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、又は、コンピュータ読み取り可能なCD-ROMなどの非一時的な記録媒体で実現されてもよく、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、及び、記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。 Note that these comprehensive or specific aspects may be realized by a system, apparatus, method, integrated circuit, computer program, or non-transitory recording medium such as a computer-readable CD-ROM. The present invention may be realized by any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a recording medium.
 本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置等は、インター予測部において、IBCを行う際に、従来よりも符号量を削減することができる。 The encoding apparatus and the like according to one aspect of the present disclosure can reduce the amount of codes compared to the conventional one when performing IBC in the inter prediction unit.
図1は、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置の機能構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the encoding apparatus according to Embodiment 1. 図2は、実施の形態1におけるブロック分割の一例を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of block division in the first embodiment. 図3は、各変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数を示す表である。FIG. 3 is a table showing conversion basis functions corresponding to each conversion type. 図4Aは、ALFで用いられるフィルタの形状の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4A is a diagram illustrating an example of the shape of a filter used in ALF. 図4Bは、ALFで用いられるフィルタの形状の他の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF. 図4Cは、ALFで用いられるフィルタの形状の他の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4C is a diagram illustrating another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF. 図5Aは、イントラ予測における67個のイントラ予測モードを示す図である。FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction. 図5Bは、OBMC処理による予測画像補正処理の概要を説明するためのフローチャートである。FIG. 5B is a flowchart for explaining the outline of the predicted image correction process by the OBMC process. 図5Cは、OBMC処理による予測画像補正処理の概要を説明するための概念図である。FIG. 5C is a conceptual diagram for explaining the outline of the predicted image correction process by the OBMC process. 図5Dは、FRUCの一例を示す図である。FIG. 5D is a diagram illustrating an example of FRUC. 図6は、動き軌道に沿う2つのブロック間でのパターンマッチング(バイラテラルマッチング)を説明するための図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along the motion trajectory. 図7は、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレートと参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でのパターンマッチング(テンプレートマッチング)を説明するための図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining pattern matching (template matching) between a template in the current picture and a block in the reference picture. 図8は、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルを説明するための図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming constant velocity linear motion. 図9Aは、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づくサブブロック単位の動きベクトルの導出を説明するための図である。FIG. 9A is a diagram for explaining derivation of a motion vector in units of sub-blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. 図9Bは、マージモードによる動きベクトル導出処理の概要を説明するための図である。FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining the outline of the motion vector deriving process in the merge mode. 図9Cは、DMVR処理の概要を説明するための概念図である。FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of DMVR processing. 図9Dは、LIC処理による輝度補正処理を用いた予測画像生成方法の概要を説明するための図である。FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an overview of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing. 図10は、実施の形態1に係る復号装置の機能構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment. 図11Aは、実施の形態における現ブロック及び参照可能領域を示す図である。FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating a current block and a referenceable area in the embodiment. 図11Bは、実施の形態におけるブロックベクトルを表した図である。FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a block vector in the embodiment. 図12Aは、実施の形態におけるブロックベクトルの水平成分が現ブロックの水平方向のサイズ以下である場合を示した図である。FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating a case where the horizontal component of the block vector in the embodiment is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block. 図12Bは、実施の形態におけるブロックベクトルの垂直成分が現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズより小さい場合を示した図である。FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating a case where the vertical component of the block vector in the embodiment is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction. 図13は、実施の形態におけるインター予測部においてIBCモードで符号化する符号化装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of an encoding apparatus that performs encoding in the IBC mode in the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment. 図14は、実施の形態におけるインター予測部により符号化されたビットストリームを復号する復号装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of a decoding device that decodes a bitstream encoded by the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment. 図15は、実施の形態におけるループフィルタ考慮制限を表す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the loop filter consideration limitation in the embodiment. 図16は、実施の形態における符号化装置の実装例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the encoding device according to the embodiment. 図17は、実施の形態における符号化装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the encoding apparatus according to the embodiment. 図18は、実施の形態における復号装置の実装例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment. 図19は、実施の形態における復号装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment. 図20は、コンテンツ配信サービスを実現するコンテンツ供給システムの全体構成図である。FIG. 20 is an overall configuration diagram of a content supply system that implements a content distribution service. 図21は、スケーラブル符号化時の符号化構造の一例を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding. 図22は、スケーラブル符号化時の符号化構造の一例を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding. 図23は、webページの表示画面例を示す図である。FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a web page display screen. 図24は、webページの表示画面例を示す図である。FIG. 24 shows an example of a web page display screen. 図25は、スマートフォンの一例を示す図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a smartphone. 図26は、スマートフォンの構成例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a smartphone.
 (本開示の基礎となった知見)
 例えば、H.265では、動画像の符号化において、インター予測を行うことができる。インター予測では、符号化対象ピクチャと時間順において近接した、符号化済みのピクチャ又は符号化が完了していないピクチャを参照ピクチャとして用いる。
(Knowledge that became the basis of this disclosure)
For example, H.M. In H.265, inter prediction can be performed in the encoding of a moving image. In inter prediction, a coded picture or a picture that has not been coded and is close in time order to the coding target picture is used as a reference picture.
 また、インター予測では、上記に限らず、現ブロックを含むピクチャであるカレントピクチャ内の復号済みの画素を参照することができる。この処理は、カレントピクチャ内の画素を参照できることから、イントラ・ブロック・コピー(IBC)と呼ばれる。IBCは、通常のインター予測のモードのうちの一つとして用いられることが可能であり、マージモード、ノーマルインターモード及びスキップモード等のいずれかと共に用いられることができる。IBCでは、カレントピクチャ内において、現ブロックと参照ブロックとの位置の変位を表すベクトルを、ブロックベクトル(BV:Block Vector)と呼ぶ。 Also, in inter prediction, not limited to the above, it is possible to refer to decoded pixels in the current picture that is a picture including the current block. This process is called intra block copy (IBC) because it can refer to pixels in the current picture. The IBC can be used as one of normal inter prediction modes, and can be used with any of the merge mode, normal inter mode, skip mode, and the like. In IBC, a vector representing a displacement of a position between a current block and a reference block in a current picture is referred to as a block vector (BV: Block Vector).
 そこで、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、画面内の符号化済みの画素から構成される予測ブロックと符号化対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを符号化し、前記ブロックベクトルの符号化において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報として、前記ブロックベクトルの前記第1成分から前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、前記ブロックベクトルを符号化する。 Thus, for example, an encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to generate a prediction block including encoded pixels in a screen. When a block vector indicating a displacement of a position with respect to the encoding target block is encoded and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the encoding of the block vector, the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is As the information indicating the first component, the block vector is encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size in the first direction of the block to be encoded from the first component of the block vector.
 これにより、符号化装置は、ブロックベクトルの成分を符号化する代わりに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分から現ブロックの水平方向のサイズを減算した値、または、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分から現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズを減算した値を符号化することができる。よって、符号化装置は、符号量を削減することができる。 As a result, instead of encoding the block vector component, the encoding device subtracts the horizontal size of the current block from the horizontal component of the block vector, or the vertical direction of the current block from the vertical component of the block vector. The value obtained by subtracting the size of can be encoded. Therefore, the encoding device can reduce the code amount.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置において、前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が、前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第2方向のサイズよりも小さいことである。 Further, for example, in the encoding device according to one aspect of the present disclosure, the predetermined condition is a second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction. Is smaller than the size of the encoding target block in the second direction.
 これにより、符号化装置は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分が現ブロックの水平方向のサイズより小さいときに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分が現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズより大きいことを符号量の削減に利用できる。このとき、符号化装置は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を符号化する代わりに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分から現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズを減算した値を符号化することが出来る。また、符号化装置は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分が現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズより小さいときに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分が現ブロックの水平方向のサイズより大きいことを符号量の削減に利用できる。このとき、符号化装置は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を符号化する代わりに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分から現ブロックの水平方向のサイズを減算した値を符号化することが出来る。よって、符号化装置は、符号量を削減することができる。 As a result, the encoding apparatus can use the fact that the vertical component of the block vector is larger than the vertical size of the current block when the horizontal component of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block, to reduce the code amount. . At this time, the encoding device can encode a value obtained by subtracting the vertical size of the current block from the vertical component of the block vector instead of encoding the vertical component of the block vector. Also, the encoding device can use the fact that when the vertical component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction, the horizontal component of the block vector is larger than the size of the current block in the horizontal direction to reduce the code amount. At this time, the encoding apparatus can encode a value obtained by subtracting the horizontal size of the current block from the horizontal component of the block vector instead of encoding the horizontal component of the block vector. Therefore, the encoding device can reduce the code amount.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置において、前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことである。 Further, for example, in the encoding device according to one aspect of the present disclosure, the predetermined condition is a second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction. Is not a negative value.
 これにより、符号化装置は、ブロックベクトルの成分の値が負でないときに、参照ブロックが参照可能領域に存在することを符号量の削減に利用できる。このとき、符号化装置は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分から現ブロックの水平方向のサイズを減算した値、または、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分から現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズを減算した値を符号化することができる。よって、符号化装置は、符号量を削減することができる。 Thereby, the encoding apparatus can use the fact that the reference block exists in the referenceable area when the value of the component of the block vector is not negative to reduce the code amount. At this time, the encoding apparatus encodes a value obtained by subtracting the horizontal size of the current block from the horizontal component of the block vector, or a value obtained by subtracting the vertical size of the current block from the vertical component of the block vector. Can do. Therefore, the encoding device can reduce the code amount.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る復号装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、画面内の復号済みブロックの画素から構成される予測ブロックと復号対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを復号し、前記ブロックベクトルの復号において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを加算して前記ブロックベクトルを復号する。 In addition, for example, a decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to decode a prediction block including pixels of a decoded block in a screen. When a block vector indicating a displacement of a position with respect to the target block is decoded and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the decoding of the block vector, the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction The block vector is decoded by adding the size of the decoding target block in the first direction to the value obtained by decoding the information indicating.
 これにより、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を復号する代わりに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報を復号して、現ブロックの水平方向のサイズを加算することで、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を取得することができる。または、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を復号する代わりに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報を復号して、現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズを加算することで、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を取得することができる。よって、復号装置は符号量を削減することができる。 Thereby, instead of decoding the horizontal component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus decodes information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector and adds the horizontal size of the current block, thereby obtaining the horizontal component of the block vector. Can be acquired. Or, instead of decoding the vertical component of the block vector, the decoding device decodes information indicating the vertical component of the block vector and adds the vertical size of the current block to obtain the vertical component of the block vector. can do. Therefore, the decoding apparatus can reduce the code amount.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る復号装置において、前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第2方向のサイズよりも小さいことである。 For example, in the decoding device according to one aspect of the present disclosure, the predetermined condition is that the second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction is The size of the block to be decoded is smaller than the size in the second direction.
 これにより、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分が現ブロックの水平方向のサイズより小さいときに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分が現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズより大きいことを符号量の削減に利用できる。このとき、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報を復号し、現ブロックの水平方向のサイズを加算することで、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を取得することができる。また、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分が現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズより小さいときに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分が現ブロックの水平方向のサイズより大きいことを符号量の削減に利用できる。このとき、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報を復号し、現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズを加算することで、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を取得することができる。よって、復号装置は符号量を削減することができる。 Thereby, the decoding apparatus can use the fact that the vertical component of the block vector is larger than the vertical size of the current block when the horizontal component of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block, for reducing the code amount. At this time, the decoding apparatus can acquire the horizontal component of the block vector by decoding the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector and adding the horizontal size of the current block. Also, the decoding apparatus can use the fact that when the vertical component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction, the horizontal component of the block vector is larger than the size of the current block in the horizontal direction to reduce the code amount. At this time, the decoding apparatus can obtain the vertical component of the block vector by decoding the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector and adding the size of the current block in the vertical direction. Therefore, the decoding apparatus can reduce the code amount.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る復号装置において、前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことである。 For example, in the decoding device according to one aspect of the present disclosure, the predetermined condition is that the second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction is It is not a negative value.
 これにより、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの成分の値が負でないときに、参照ブロックが参照可能領域に存在することを符号量の削減に利用できる。このとき、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの成分を復号する代わりに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報を復号して、復号した値に現ブロックの水平方向のサイズを加算することで、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を取得することができる。または、復号装置は、ブロックベクトルの成分を復号する代わりに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報を復号して、復号した値に現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズを加算することで、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を取得することができる。よって、復号装置は符号量を削減することができる。 Thereby, the decoding apparatus can use the fact that the reference block exists in the referenceable area when the value of the component of the block vector is not negative to reduce the code amount. At this time, instead of decoding the block vector component, the decoding apparatus decodes information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, and adds the horizontal size of the current block to the decoded value. The horizontal component can be acquired. Alternatively, the decoding device decodes information indicating the vertical component of the block vector instead of decoding the component of the block vector, and adds the vertical size of the current block to the decoded value, thereby obtaining the vertical value of the block vector. Ingredients can be obtained. Therefore, the decoding apparatus can reduce the code amount.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る符号化方法は、画面内の符号化済みの画素から構成される予測ブロックと符号化対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを符号化し、前記ブロックベクトルの符号化において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報として、前記ブロックベクトルの前記第1成分から前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、前記ブロックベクトルを符号化する。 Further, for example, the encoding method according to one aspect of the present disclosure encodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position between a prediction block configured with encoded pixels in a screen and a block to be encoded, and the block In vector encoding, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the code from the first component of the block vector is used as information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The block vector is encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size of the block to be converted in the first direction.
 これにより、符号化方法は、上記符号化装置と同様の効果を奏することができる。 Thereby, the encoding method can achieve the same effect as the above encoding apparatus.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る復号方法は、画面内の復号済みブロックの画素から構成される予測ブロックと復号対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを復号し、前記ブロックベクトルの復号において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを加算して前記ブロックベクトルを復号する。 Further, for example, the decoding method according to one aspect of the present disclosure decodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position between a prediction block configured with pixels of a decoded block in a screen and a decoding target block, In decoding, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first value of the decoding target block is determined with respect to a value obtained by decoding information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The block vector is decoded by adding the size in the direction.
 これにより、復号方法は、上記復号装置と同様の効果を奏することができる。 Thereby, the decoding method can achieve the same effect as the above decoding apparatus.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置は、分割部と、イントラ予測部と、インター予測部と、ループフィルタ部と、変換部と、量子化部と、エントロピー符号化部とを備えてもよい。 In addition, for example, an encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a dividing unit, an intra prediction unit, an inter prediction unit, a loop filter unit, a conversion unit, a quantization unit, and an entropy encoding unit. You may prepare.
 前記分割部は、ピクチャを複数のブロックに分割してもよい。前記イントラ予測部は、前記複数のブロックに含まれるブロックに対してイントラ予測を行ってもよい。前記インター予測部は、前記ブロックに対してインター予測を行ってもよい。前記変換部は、前記イントラ予測又は前記インター予測によって得られる予測画像と、原画像との予測誤差を変換して、変換係数を生成してもよい。前記量子化部は、前記変換係数を量子化して量子化係数を生成してもよい。前記エントロピー符号化部は、前記量子化係数を符号化して符号化ビットストリームを生成してもよい。前記ループフィルタ部は、前記ブロックの再構成画像にフィルタを適用してもよい。 The dividing unit may divide a picture into a plurality of blocks. The intra prediction unit may perform intra prediction on blocks included in the plurality of blocks. The inter prediction unit may perform inter prediction on the block. The conversion unit may generate a conversion coefficient by converting a prediction error between a predicted image obtained by the intra prediction or the inter prediction and an original image. The quantization unit may quantize the transform coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient. The entropy encoding unit may generate an encoded bitstream by encoding the quantization coefficient. The loop filter unit may apply a filter to the reconstructed image of the block.
 また、例えば、前記符号化装置は、複数のピクチャを含む動画像を符号化する符号化装置であってもよい。 Further, for example, the encoding device may be an encoding device that encodes a moving image including a plurality of pictures.
 そして、インター予測部は、画面内の符号化済みの画素から構成される予測ブロックと符号化対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを符号化し、前記ブロックベクトルの符号化において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報として、前記ブロックベクトルの前記第1成分から前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、前記ブロックベクトルを符号化してもよい。 Then, the inter prediction unit encodes a block vector indicating the displacement of the position of the prediction block composed of the encoded pixels in the screen and the encoding target block, and in the encoding of the block vector, a predetermined condition When satisfying, as information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, from the first component of the block vector to the first direction of the encoding target block The block vector may be encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size.
 また、例えば、本開示の一態様に係る復号装置は、エントロピー復号部と、逆量子化部と、逆変換部と、イントラ予測部と、インター予測部と、ループフィルタ部とを備えてもよい。 For example, the decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure may include an entropy decoding unit, an inverse quantization unit, an inverse transform unit, an intra prediction unit, an inter prediction unit, and a loop filter unit. .
 前記エントロピー復号部は、符号化ビットストリームからピクチャ内のブロックの量子化係数を復号してもよい。前記逆量子化部は、前記量子化係数を逆量子化して変換係数を取得してもよい。前記逆変換部は、前記変換係数を逆変換して予測誤差を取得してもよい。前記イントラ予測部は、前記ブロックに対してイントラ予測を行ってもよい。前記インター予測部は、前記ブロックに対してインター予測を行ってもよい。前記フィルタ部は、前記イントラ予測又は前記インター予測によって得られる予測画像と前記予測誤差とを用いて生成される再構成画像にフィルタを適用してもよい。 The entropy decoding unit may decode the quantization coefficient of the block in the picture from the encoded bit stream. The inverse quantization unit may obtain the transform coefficient by inverse quantization of the quantization coefficient. The inverse transform unit may inversely transform the transform coefficient to obtain a prediction error. The intra prediction unit may perform intra prediction on the block. The inter prediction unit may perform inter prediction on the block. The filter unit may apply a filter to a reconstructed image generated using a prediction image obtained by the intra prediction or the inter prediction and the prediction error.
 また、例えば、前記復号装置は、複数のピクチャを含む動画像を復号する復号装置であってもよい。 For example, the decoding device may be a decoding device that decodes a moving image including a plurality of pictures.
 そして、インター予測部は、画面内の復号済みブロックの画素から構成される予測ブロックと復号対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを復号し、前記ブロックベクトルの復号において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを加算して前記ブロックベクトルを復号してもよい。 Then, the inter prediction unit decodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a prediction block constituted by pixels of a decoded block in the screen and a decoding target block, and satisfies a predetermined condition in the decoding of the block vector In this case, the size in the first direction of the decoding target block is added to the value obtained by decoding the information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, The block vector may be decoded.
 さらに、これらの包括的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、又は、コンピュータ読み取り可能なCD-ROMなどの非一時的な記録媒体で実現されてもよく、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、及び、記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。 Furthermore, these comprehensive or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer-readable CD-ROM. The present invention may be realized by any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a recording medium.
 以下、実施の形態について図面を参照しながら具体的に説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
 なお、以下で説明する実施の形態は、いずれも包括的または具体的な例を示すものである。以下の実施の形態で示される数値、形状、材料、構成要素、構成要素の配置位置及び接続形態、ステップ、ステップの順序などは、一例であり、請求の範囲を限定する主旨ではない。また、以下の実施の形態における構成要素のうち、最上位概念を示す独立請求項に記載されていない構成要素については、任意の構成要素として説明される。 It should be noted that each of the embodiments described below shows a comprehensive or specific example. Numerical values, shapes, materials, components, arrangement positions and connection forms of components, steps, order of steps, and the like shown in the following embodiments are merely examples, and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims. In addition, among the constituent elements in the following embodiments, constituent elements that are not described in the independent claims indicating the highest concept are described as optional constituent elements.
 (実施の形態1)
 まず、後述する本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例として、実施の形態1の概要を説明する。ただし、実施の形態1は、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例にすぎず、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成は、実施の形態1とは異なる符号化装置および復号化装置においても実施可能である。
(Embodiment 1)
First, an outline of the first embodiment will be described as an example of an encoding device and a decoding device to which the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure to be described later can be applied. However, the first embodiment is merely an example of an encoding device and a decoding device to which the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure can be applied, and the processing and / or processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure. The configuration can also be implemented in an encoding device and a decoding device different from those in the first embodiment.
 実施の形態1に対して本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成を適用する場合、例えば以下のいずれかを行ってもよい。 When applying the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure to Embodiment 1, for example, one of the following may be performed.
 (1)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置に対して、当該符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうち、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に対応する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に置き換えること
 (2)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置に対して、当該符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうち一部の構成要素について機能または実施する処理の追加、置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に対応する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に置き換えること
 (3)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、処理の追加、および/または当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理について置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
 (4)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
 (5)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
 (6)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうち、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
 (7)実施の形態1の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理と組み合わせて実施すること
(1) The encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment corresponds to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure among a plurality of constituent elements constituting the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus. Replacing the constituent elements with constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure (2) A plurality of constituent elements constituting the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus with respect to the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus of the first embodiment The constituent elements corresponding to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure are added to the present disclosure after arbitrary changes such as addition, replacement, and deletion of functions or processes to be performed on some constituent elements among the constituent elements. (3) Addition of processes and / or a plurality of processes included in the method to the method performed by the encoding apparatus or decoding apparatus of the first embodiment home Replace any processing corresponding to the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure with the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure after performing arbitrary changes such as replacement and deletion of a part of the processing (4) Implementation The constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure, the constituent elements described in the respective aspects of the present disclosure are part of the plurality of constituent elements constituting the encoding device or the decoding device of the first embodiment (5) Encoding device according to Embodiment 1 that is implemented in combination with a component that includes a part of the functions provided, or a component that performs a part of processing performed by a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure Alternatively, a component provided with a part of the functions provided by some of the components included in the decoding device, or a plurality of components included in the encoding device or the decoding device according to the first embodiment. Some of A component that performs a part of processing performed by a component is a component that is described in each aspect of the present disclosure, a component that includes a part of a function included in a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, or a book (6) A method performed by the encoding device or the decoding device according to Embodiment 1 is performed in combination with a component that performs a part of processing performed by the component described in each aspect of the disclosure. Of the plurality of processes included in the method, the process corresponding to the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure is replaced with the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure. (7) The encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment or A part of the plurality of processes included in the method performed by the decoding device is performed in combination with the processes described in each aspect of the present disclosure
 なお、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および/または構成の実施の仕方は、上記の例に限定されるものではない。例えば、実施の形態1において開示する動画像/画像符号化装置または動画像/画像復号化装置とは異なる目的で利用される装置において実施されてもよいし、各態様において説明した処理および/または構成を単独で実施してもよい。また、異なる態様において説明した処理および/または構成を組み合わせて実施してもよい。 Note that the processes and / or configurations described in each aspect of the present disclosure are not limited to the above examples. For example, the present invention may be implemented in an apparatus used for a different purpose from the moving picture / picture encoding apparatus or moving picture / picture decoding apparatus disclosed in the first embodiment, and the processing and / or described in each aspect. The configuration may be implemented alone. Moreover, you may implement combining the process and / or structure which were demonstrated in the different aspect.
 [符号化装置の概要]
 まず、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置の概要を説明する。図1は、実施の形態1に係る符号化装置100の機能構成を示すブロック図である。符号化装置100は、動画像/画像をブロック単位で符号化する動画像/画像符号化装置である。
[Outline of encoding device]
First, the outline | summary of the encoding apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 1 is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of encoding apparatus 100 according to Embodiment 1. The encoding device 100 is a moving image / image encoding device that encodes moving images / images in units of blocks.
 図1に示すように、符号化装置100は、画像をブロック単位で符号化する装置であって、分割部102と、減算部104と、変換部106と、量子化部108と、エントロピー符号化部110と、逆量子化部112と、逆変換部114と、加算部116と、ブロックメモリ118と、ループフィルタ部120と、フレームメモリ122と、イントラ予測部124と、インター予測部126と、予測制御部128と、を備える。 As shown in FIG. 1, an encoding apparatus 100 is an apparatus that encodes an image in units of blocks, and includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a transforming unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, and entropy encoding. Unit 110, inverse quantization unit 112, inverse transform unit 114, addition unit 116, block memory 118, loop filter unit 120, frame memory 122, intra prediction unit 124, inter prediction unit 126, A prediction control unit 128.
 符号化装置100は、例えば、汎用プロセッサ及びメモリにより実現される。この場合、メモリに格納されたソフトウェアプログラムがプロセッサにより実行されたときに、プロセッサは、分割部102、減算部104、変換部106、量子化部108、エントロピー符号化部110、逆量子化部112、逆変換部114、加算部116、ループフィルタ部120、イントラ予測部124、インター予測部126及び予測制御部128として機能する。また、符号化装置100は、分割部102、減算部104、変換部106、量子化部108、エントロピー符号化部110、逆量子化部112、逆変換部114、加算部116、ループフィルタ部120、イントラ予測部124、インター予測部126及び予測制御部128に対応する専用の1以上の電子回路として実現されてもよい。 The encoding device 100 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the software program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the processor performs the division unit 102, the subtraction unit 104, the conversion unit 106, the quantization unit 108, the entropy encoding unit 110, and the inverse quantization unit 112. , An inverse transform unit 114, an addition unit 116, a loop filter unit 120, an intra prediction unit 124, an inter prediction unit 126, and a prediction control unit 128. The encoding apparatus 100 includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a transforming unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, an entropy coding unit 110, an inverse quantizing unit 112, an inverse transforming unit 114, an adding unit 116, and a loop filter unit 120. The intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128 may be implemented as one or more dedicated electronic circuits.
 以下に、符号化装置100に含まれる各構成要素について説明する。 Hereinafter, each component included in the encoding device 100 will be described.
 [分割部]
 分割部102は、入力動画像に含まれる各ピクチャを複数のブロックに分割し、各ブロックを減算部104に出力する。例えば、分割部102は、まず、ピクチャを固定サイズ(例えば128x128)のブロックに分割する。この固定サイズのブロックは、符号化ツリーユニット(CTU)と呼ばれることがある。そして、分割部102は、再帰的な四分木(quadtree)及び/又は二分木(binary tree)ブロック分割に基づいて、固定サイズのブロックの各々を可変サイズ(例えば64x64以下)のブロックに分割する。この可変サイズのブロックは、符号化ユニット(CU)、予測ユニット(PU)あるいは変換ユニット(TU)と呼ばれることがある。なお、本実施の形態では、CU、PU及びTUは区別される必要はなく、ピクチャ内の一部又はすべてのブロックがCU、PU、TUの処理単位となってもよい。
[Division part]
The dividing unit 102 divides each picture included in the input moving image into a plurality of blocks, and outputs each block to the subtracting unit 104. For example, the dividing unit 102 first divides a picture into blocks of a fixed size (for example, 128 × 128). This fixed size block may be referred to as a coding tree unit (CTU). Then, the dividing unit 102 divides each of the fixed size blocks into blocks of a variable size (for example, 64 × 64 or less) based on recursive quadtree and / or binary tree block division. . This variable size block may be referred to as a coding unit (CU), a prediction unit (PU) or a transform unit (TU). In the present embodiment, CU, PU, and TU do not need to be distinguished, and some or all blocks in a picture may be processing units of CU, PU, and TU.
 図2は、実施の形態1におけるブロック分割の一例を示す図である。図2において、実線は四分木ブロック分割によるブロック境界を表し、破線は二分木ブロック分割によるブロック境界を表す。 FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment. In FIG. 2, a solid line represents a block boundary by quadtree block division, and a broken line represents a block boundary by binary tree block division.
 ここでは、ブロック10は、128x128画素の正方形ブロック(128x128ブロック)である。この128x128ブロック10は、まず、4つの正方形の64x64ブロックに分割される(四分木ブロック分割)。 Here, the block 10 is a 128 × 128 pixel square block (128 × 128 block). The 128 × 128 block 10 is first divided into four square 64 × 64 blocks (quadtree block division).
 左上の64x64ブロックは、さらに2つの矩形の32x64ブロックに垂直に分割され、左の32x64ブロックはさらに2つの矩形の16x64ブロックに垂直に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。その結果、左上の64x64ブロックは、2つの16x64ブロック11、12と、32x64ブロック13とに分割される。 The upper left 64 × 64 block is further divided vertically into two rectangular 32 × 64 blocks, and the left 32 × 64 block is further divided vertically into two rectangular 16 × 64 blocks (binary tree block division). As a result, the upper left 64 × 64 block is divided into two 16 × 64 blocks 11 and 12 and a 32 × 64 block 13.
 右上の64x64ブロックは、2つの矩形の64x32ブロック14、15に水平に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。 The upper right 64 × 64 block is horizontally divided into two rectangular 64 × 32 blocks 14 and 15 (binary tree block division).
 左下の64x64ブロックは、4つの正方形の32x32ブロックに分割される(四分木ブロック分割)。4つの32x32ブロックのうち左上のブロック及び右下のブロックはさらに分割される。左上の32x32ブロックは、2つの矩形の16x32ブロックに垂直に分割され、右の16x32ブロックはさらに2つの16x16ブロックに水平に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。右下の32x32ブロックは、2つの32x16ブロックに水平に分割される(二分木ブロック分割)。その結果、左下の64x64ブロックは、16x32ブロック16と、2つの16x16ブロック17、18と、2つの32x32ブロック19、20と、2つの32x16ブロック21、22とに分割される。 The lower left 64x64 block is divided into four square 32x32 blocks (quadrant block division). Of the four 32 × 32 blocks, the upper left block and the lower right block are further divided. The upper left 32 × 32 block is vertically divided into two rectangular 16 × 32 blocks, and the right 16 × 32 block is further divided horizontally into two 16 × 16 blocks (binary tree block division). The lower right 32 × 32 block is horizontally divided into two 32 × 16 blocks (binary tree block division). As a result, the lower left 64 × 64 block is divided into a 16 × 32 block 16, two 16 × 16 blocks 17 and 18, two 32 × 32 blocks 19 and 20, and two 32 × 16 blocks 21 and 22.
 右下の64x64ブロック23は分割されない。 The lower right 64x64 block 23 is not divided.
 以上のように、図2では、ブロック10は、再帰的な四分木及び二分木ブロック分割に基づいて、13個の可変サイズのブロック11~23に分割される。このような分割は、QTBT(quad-tree plus binary tree)分割と呼ばれることがある。 As described above, in FIG. 2, the block 10 is divided into 13 variable-size blocks 11 to 23 based on the recursive quadtree and binary tree block division. Such division may be called QTBT (quad-tree plus binary tree) division.
 なお、図2では、1つのブロックが4つ又は2つのブロックに分割されていたが(四分木又は二分木ブロック分割)、分割はこれに限定されない。例えば、1つのブロックが3つのブロックに分割されてもよい(三分木ブロック分割)。このような三分木ブロック分割を含む分割は、MBT(multi type tree)分割と呼ばれることがある。 In FIG. 2, one block is divided into four or two blocks (quadrature tree or binary tree block division), but the division is not limited to this. For example, one block may be divided into three blocks (triple tree block division). Such a division including a tri-tree block division may be called an MBT (multi type tree) division.
 [減算部]
 減算部104は、分割部102によって分割されたブロック単位で原信号(原サンプル)から予測信号(予測サンプル)を減算する。つまり、減算部104は、符号化対象ブロック(以下、カレントブロックという)の予測誤差(残差ともいう)を算出する。そして、減算部104は、算出された予測誤差を変換部106に出力する。
[Subtraction section]
The subtraction unit 104 subtracts the prediction signal (prediction sample) from the original signal (original sample) in units of blocks divided by the division unit 102. That is, the subtraction unit 104 calculates a prediction error (also referred to as a residual) of a coding target block (hereinafter referred to as a current block). Then, the subtraction unit 104 outputs the calculated prediction error to the conversion unit 106.
 原信号は、符号化装置100の入力信号であり、動画像を構成する各ピクチャの画像を表す信号(例えば輝度(luma)信号及び2つの色差(chroma)信号)である。以下において、画像を表す信号をサンプルともいうこともある。 The original signal is an input signal of the encoding device 100, and is a signal (for example, a luminance (luma) signal and two color difference (chroma) signals) representing an image of each picture constituting the moving image. Hereinafter, a signal representing an image may be referred to as a sample.
 [変換部]
 変換部106は、空間領域の予測誤差を周波数領域の変換係数に変換し、変換係数を量子化部108に出力する。具体的には、変換部106は、例えば空間領域の予測誤差に対して予め定められた離散コサイン変換(DCT)又は離散サイン変換(DST)を行う。
[Conversion section]
The transform unit 106 transforms the prediction error in the spatial domain into a transform factor in the frequency domain, and outputs the transform coefficient to the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the transform unit 106 performs, for example, a predetermined discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on a prediction error in the spatial domain.
 なお、変換部106は、複数の変換タイプの中から適応的に変換タイプを選択し、選択された変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数(transform basis function)を用いて、予測誤差を変換係数に変換してもよい。このような変換は、EMT(explicit multiple core transform)又はAMT(adaptive multiple transform)と呼ばれることがある。 Note that the conversion unit 106 adaptively selects a conversion type from a plurality of conversion types, and converts a prediction error into a conversion coefficient using a conversion basis function corresponding to the selected conversion type. May be. Such a conversion may be referred to as EMT (explicit multiple core transform) or AMT (adaptive multiple transform).
 複数の変換タイプは、例えば、DCT-II、DCT-V、DCT-VIII、DST-I及びDST-VIIを含む。図3は、各変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数を示す表である。図3においてNは入力画素の数を示す。これらの複数の変換タイプの中からの変換タイプの選択は、例えば、予測の種類(イントラ予測及びインター予測)に依存してもよいし、イントラ予測モードに依存してもよい。 The plurality of conversion types include, for example, DCT-II, DCT-V, DCT-VIII, DST-I and DST-VII. FIG. 3 is a table showing conversion basis functions corresponding to each conversion type. In FIG. 3, N indicates the number of input pixels. Selection of a conversion type from among these multiple conversion types may depend on, for example, the type of prediction (intra prediction and inter prediction), or may depend on an intra prediction mode.
 このようなEMT又はAMTを適用するか否かを示す情報(例えばAMTフラグと呼ばれる)及び選択された変換タイプを示す情報は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。 Information indicating whether or not to apply such EMT or AMT (for example, called an AMT flag) and information indicating the selected conversion type are signaled at the CU level. Note that the signalization of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be other levels (for example, a sequence level, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level).
 また、変換部106は、変換係数(変換結果)を再変換してもよい。このような再変換は、AST(adaptive secondary transform)又はNSST(non-separable secondary transform)と呼ばれることがある。例えば、変換部106は、イントラ予測誤差に対応する変換係数のブロックに含まれるサブブロック(例えば4x4サブブロック)ごとに再変換を行う。NSSTを適用するか否かを示す情報及びNSSTに用いられる変換行列に関する情報は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。 Further, the conversion unit 106 may reconvert the conversion coefficient (conversion result). Such reconversion is sometimes referred to as AST (adaptive secondary transform) or NSST (non-separable secondary transform). For example, the conversion unit 106 performs re-conversion for each sub-block (for example, 4 × 4 sub-block) included in the block of the conversion coefficient corresponding to the intra prediction error. Information indicating whether or not NSST is applied and information related to the transformation matrix used for NSST are signaled at the CU level. Note that the signalization of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be other levels (for example, a sequence level, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level).
 ここで、Separableな変換とは、入力の次元の数だけ方向ごとに分離して複数回変換を行う方式であり、Non-Separableな変換とは、入力が多次元であった際に2つ以上の次元をまとめて1次元とみなして、まとめて変換を行う方式である。 Here, the separable conversion is a method of performing the conversion a plurality of times by separating the number of dimensions of the input for each direction, and the non-separable conversion is two or more when the input is multidimensional. In this method, the dimensions are collectively regarded as one dimension, and conversion is performed collectively.
 例えば、Non-Separableな変換の1例として、入力が4×4のブロックであった場合にはそれを16個の要素を持ったひとつの配列とみなし、その配列に対して16×16の変換行列で変換処理を行うようなものが挙げられる。 For example, as an example of non-separable conversion, if an input is a 4 × 4 block, it is regarded as one array having 16 elements, and 16 × 16 conversion is performed on the array. The thing which performs the conversion process with a matrix is mentioned.
 また、同様に4×4の入力ブロックを16個の要素を持ったひとつの配列とみなした後に、その配列に対してGivens回転を複数回行うようなもの(Hypercube Givens Transform)もNon-Separableな変換の例である。 Similarly, a 4 × 4 input block is regarded as a single array having 16 elements, and then the Givens rotation is performed multiple times on the array (Hypercube Givens Transform) is also a non-separable. It is an example of conversion.
 [量子化部]
 量子化部108は、変換部106から出力された変換係数を量子化する。具体的には、量子化部108は、カレントブロックの変換係数を所定の走査順序で走査し、走査された変換係数に対応する量子化パラメータ(QP)に基づいて当該変換係数を量子化する。そして、量子化部108は、カレントブロックの量子化された変換係数(以下、量子化係数という)をエントロピー符号化部110及び逆量子化部112に出力する。
[Quantization unit]
The quantization unit 108 quantizes the transform coefficient output from the transform unit 106. Specifically, the quantization unit 108 scans the transform coefficients of the current block in a predetermined scanning order, and quantizes the transform coefficients based on the quantization parameter (QP) corresponding to the scanned transform coefficients. Then, the quantization unit 108 outputs the quantized transform coefficient (hereinafter referred to as a quantization coefficient) of the current block to the entropy encoding unit 110 and the inverse quantization unit 112.
 所定の順序は、変換係数の量子化/逆量子化のための順序である。例えば、所定の走査順序は、周波数の昇順(低周波から高周波の順)又は降順(高周波から低周波の順)で定義される。 The predetermined order is an order for quantization / inverse quantization of transform coefficients. For example, the predetermined scanning order is defined in ascending order of frequency (order from low frequency to high frequency) or descending order (order from high frequency to low frequency).
 量子化パラメータとは、量子化ステップ(量子化幅)を定義するパラメータである。例えば、量子化パラメータの値が増加すれば量子化ステップも増加する。つまり、量子化パラメータの値が増加すれば量子化誤差が増大する。 The quantization parameter is a parameter that defines a quantization step (quantization width). For example, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization step also increases. That is, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization error increases.
 [エントロピー符号化部]
 エントロピー符号化部110は、量子化部108から入力である量子化係数を可変長符号化することにより符号化信号(符号化ビットストリーム)を生成する。具体的には、エントロピー符号化部110は、例えば、量子化係数を二値化し、二値信号を算術符号化する。
[Entropy encoding unit]
The entropy encoding unit 110 generates an encoded signal (encoded bit stream) by performing variable length encoding on the quantization coefficient that is input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the entropy encoding unit 110 binarizes the quantization coefficient, for example, and arithmetically encodes the binary signal.
 [逆量子化部]
 逆量子化部112は、量子化部108からの入力である量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部112は、カレントブロックの量子化係数を所定の走査順序で逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部112は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された変換係数を逆変換部114に出力する。
[Inverse quantization unit]
The inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient that is an input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scanning order. Then, the inverse quantization unit 112 outputs the inverse-quantized transform coefficient of the current block to the inverse transform unit 114.
 [逆変換部]
 逆変換部114は、逆量子化部112からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。具体的には、逆変換部114は、変換係数に対して、変換部106による変換に対応する逆変換を行うことにより、カレントブロックの予測誤差を復元する。そして、逆変換部114は、復元された予測誤差を加算部116に出力する。
[Inverse conversion part]
The inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error by inverse transforming the transform coefficient that is an input from the inverse quantization unit 112. Specifically, the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error of the current block by performing an inverse transform corresponding to the transform by the transform unit 106 on the transform coefficient. Then, the inverse transformation unit 114 outputs the restored prediction error to the addition unit 116.
 なお、復元された予測誤差は、量子化により情報が失われているので、減算部104が算出した予測誤差と一致しない。すなわち、復元された予測誤差には、量子化誤差が含まれている。 Note that the restored prediction error does not match the prediction error calculated by the subtraction unit 104 because information is lost due to quantization. That is, the restored prediction error includes a quantization error.
 [加算部]
 加算部116は、逆変換部114からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部128からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部116は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ118及びループフィルタ部120に出力する。再構成ブロックは、ローカル復号ブロックと呼ばれることもある。
[Addition part]
The adder 116 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error input from the inverse transform unit 114 and the prediction sample input from the prediction control unit 128. Then, the adding unit 116 outputs the reconfigured block to the block memory 118 and the loop filter unit 120. The reconstructed block is sometimes referred to as a local decoding block.
 [ブロックメモリ]
 ブロックメモリ118は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって符号化対象ピクチャ(以下、カレントピクチャという)内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ118は、加算部116から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。
[Block memory]
The block memory 118 is a storage unit for storing blocks in an encoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as current picture) that are referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 118 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 116.
 [ループフィルタ部]
 ループフィルタ部120は、加算部116によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ122に出力する。ループフィルタとは、符号化ループ内で用いられるフィルタ(インループフィルタ)であり、例えば、デブロッキング・フィルタ(DF)、サンプルアダプティブオフセット(SAO)及びアダプティブループフィルタ(ALF)などを含む。
[Loop filter section]
The loop filter unit 120 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 116 and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 122. The loop filter is a filter (in-loop filter) used in the encoding loop, and includes, for example, a deblocking filter (DF), a sample adaptive offset (SAO), an adaptive loop filter (ALF), and the like.
 ALFでは、符号化歪みを除去するための最小二乗誤差フィルタが適用され、例えばカレントブロック内の2x2サブブロックごとに、局所的な勾配(gradient)の方向及び活性度(activity)に基づいて複数のフィルタの中から選択された1つのフィルタが適用される。 In ALF, a least square error filter is applied to remove coding distortion. For example, for each 2 × 2 sub-block in the current block, a plurality of multiples based on the direction of the local gradient and the activity are provided. One filter selected from the filters is applied.
 具体的には、まず、サブブロック(例えば2x2サブブロック)が複数のクラス(例えば15又は25クラス)に分類される。サブブロックの分類は、勾配の方向及び活性度に基づいて行われる。例えば、勾配の方向値D(例えば0~2又は0~4)と勾配の活性値A(例えば0~4)とを用いて分類値C(例えばC=5D+A)が算出される。そして、分類値Cに基づいて、サブブロックが複数のクラス(例えば15又は25クラス)に分類される。 Specifically, first, sub-blocks (for example, 2 × 2 sub-blocks) are classified into a plurality of classes (for example, 15 or 25 classes). Sub-block classification is performed based on gradient direction and activity. For example, the classification value C (for example, C = 5D + A) is calculated using the gradient direction value D (for example, 0 to 2 or 0 to 4) and the gradient activity value A (for example, 0 to 4). Then, based on the classification value C, the sub-blocks are classified into a plurality of classes (for example, 15 or 25 classes).
 勾配の方向値Dは、例えば、複数の方向(例えば水平、垂直及び2つの対角方向)の勾配を比較することにより導出される。また、勾配の活性値Aは、例えば、複数の方向の勾配を加算し、加算結果を量子化することにより導出される。 The direction value D of the gradient is derived, for example, by comparing gradients in a plurality of directions (for example, horizontal, vertical, and two diagonal directions). The gradient activation value A is derived, for example, by adding gradients in a plurality of directions and quantizing the addition result.
 このような分類の結果に基づいて、複数のフィルタの中からサブブロックのためのフィルタが決定される。 -Based on the result of such classification, a filter for a sub-block is determined from among a plurality of filters.
 ALFで用いられるフィルタの形状としては例えば円対称形状が利用される。図4A~図4Cは、ALFで用いられるフィルタの形状の複数の例を示す図である。図4Aは、5x5ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示し、図4Bは、7x7ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示し、図4Cは、9x9ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示す。フィルタの形状を示す情報は、ピクチャレベルで信号化される。なお、フィルタの形状を示す情報の信号化は、ピクチャレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はCUレベル)であってもよい。 As the shape of the filter used in ALF, for example, a circularly symmetric shape is used. 4A to 4C are diagrams showing a plurality of examples of filter shapes used in ALF. 4A shows a 5 × 5 diamond shape filter, FIG. 4B shows a 7 × 7 diamond shape filter, and FIG. 4C shows a 9 × 9 diamond shape filter. Information indicating the shape of the filter is signalized at the picture level. It should be noted that the signalization of the information indicating the filter shape need not be limited to the picture level, but may be another level (for example, a sequence level, a slice level, a tile level, a CTU level, or a CU level).
 ALFのオン/オフは、例えば、ピクチャレベル又はCUレベルで決定される。例えば、輝度についてはCUレベルでALFを適用するか否かが決定され、色差についてはピクチャレベルでALFを適用するか否かが決定される。ALFのオン/オフを示す情報は、ピクチャレベル又はCUレベルで信号化される。なお、ALFのオン/オフを示す情報の信号化は、ピクチャレベル又はCUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。 ON / OFF of ALF is determined at the picture level or the CU level, for example. For example, for luminance, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the CU level, and for color difference, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the picture level. Information indicating ALF on / off is signaled at the picture level or the CU level. Signaling of information indicating ALF on / off need not be limited to the picture level or the CU level, and may be performed at other levels (for example, a sequence level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level). Good.
 選択可能な複数のフィルタ(例えば15又は25までのフィルタ)の係数セットは、ピクチャレベルで信号化される。なお、係数セットの信号化は、ピクチャレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル、CUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。 A coefficient set of a plurality of selectable filters (for example, up to 15 or 25 filters) is signalized at the picture level. The signalization of the coefficient set need not be limited to the picture level, but may be another level (for example, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, CU level, or sub-block level).
 [フレームメモリ]
 フレームメモリ122は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ122は、ループフィルタ部120によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。
[Frame memory]
The frame memory 122 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and is sometimes called a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 122 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 120.
 [イントラ予測部]
 イントラ予測部124は、ブロックメモリ118に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してカレントブロックのイントラ予測(画面内予測ともいう)を行うことで、予測信号(イントラ予測信号)を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部124は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル(例えば輝度値、色差値)を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部128に出力する。
[Intra prediction section]
The intra prediction unit 124 generates a prediction signal (intra prediction signal) by referring to the block in the current picture stored in the block memory 118 and performing intra prediction (also referred to as intra-screen prediction) of the current block. Specifically, the intra prediction unit 124 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to a sample (for example, luminance value and color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. To the unit 128.
 例えば、イントラ予測部124は、予め規定された複数のイントラ予測モードのうちの1つを用いてイントラ予測を行う。複数のイントラ予測モードは、1以上の非方向性予測モードと、複数の方向性予測モードと、を含む。 For example, the intra prediction unit 124 performs intra prediction using one of a plurality of predefined intra prediction modes. The plurality of intra prediction modes include one or more non-directional prediction modes and a plurality of directional prediction modes.
 1以上の非方向性予測モードは、例えばH.265/HEVC(High-Efficiency Video Coding)規格(非特許文献1)で規定されたPlanar予測モード及びDC予測モードを含む。 One or more non-directional prediction modes are for example H.264. It includes Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined by H.265 / HEVC (High-Efficiency Video Coding) standard (Non-patent Document 1).
 複数の方向性予測モードは、例えばH.265/HEVC規格で規定された33方向の予測モードを含む。なお、複数の方向性予測モードは、33方向に加えてさらに32方向の予測モード(合計で65個の方向性予測モード)を含んでもよい。図5Aは、イントラ予測における67個のイントラ予測モード(2個の非方向性予測モード及び65個の方向性予測モード)を示す図である。実線矢印は、H.265/HEVC規格で規定された33方向を表し、破線矢印は、追加された32方向を表す。 The multiple directionality prediction modes are for example H.264. It includes 33-direction prediction modes defined by the H.265 / HEVC standard. In addition to the 33 directions, the plurality of directionality prediction modes may further include 32 direction prediction modes (a total of 65 directionality prediction modes). FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes (two non-directional prediction modes and 65 directional prediction modes) in intra prediction. Solid arrows indicate H. The 33 directions defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard are represented, and the dashed arrow represents the added 32 directions.
 なお、色差ブロックのイントラ予測において、輝度ブロックが参照されてもよい。つまり、カレントブロックの輝度成分に基づいて、カレントブロックの色差成分が予測されてもよい。このようなイントラ予測は、CCLM(cross-component linear model)予測と呼ばれることがある。このような輝度ブロックを参照する色差ブロックのイントラ予測モード(例えばCCLMモードと呼ばれる)は、色差ブロックのイントラ予測モードの1つとして加えられてもよい。 Note that the luminance block may be referred to in the intra prediction of the color difference block. That is, the color difference component of the current block may be predicted based on the luminance component of the current block. Such intra prediction is sometimes called CCLM (cross-component linear model) prediction. The intra prediction mode (for example, called CCLM mode) of the color difference block which refers to such a luminance block may be added as one of the intra prediction modes of the color difference block.
 イントラ予測部124は、水平/垂直方向の参照画素の勾配に基づいてイントラ予測後の画素値を補正してもよい。このような補正をともなうイントラ予測は、PDPC(position dependent intra prediction combination)と呼ばれることがある。PDPCの適用の有無を示す情報(例えばPDPCフラグと呼ばれる)は、例えばCUレベルで信号化される。なお、この情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はCTUレベル)であってもよい。 The intra prediction unit 124 may correct the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical direction. Intra prediction with such correction may be called PDPC (position dependent intra prediction combination). Information indicating whether or not PDPC is applied (for example, referred to as a PDPC flag) is signaled, for example, at the CU level. The signalization of this information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be another level (for example, a sequence level, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, or a CTU level).
 [インター予測部]
 インター予測部126は、フレームメモリ122に格納された参照ピクチャであってカレントピクチャとは異なる参照ピクチャを参照してカレントブロックのインター予測(画面間予測ともいう)を行うことで、予測信号(インター予測信号)を生成する。インター予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック(例えば4x4ブロック)の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部126は、カレントブロック又はサブブロックについて参照ピクチャ内で動き探索(motion estimation)を行う。そして、インター予測部126は、動き探索により得られた動き情報(例えば動きベクトル)を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成する。そして、インター予測部126は、生成されたインター予測信号を予測制御部128に出力する。
[Inter prediction section]
The inter prediction unit 126 refers to a reference picture stored in the frame memory 122 and is different from the current picture, and performs inter prediction (also referred to as inter-screen prediction) of the current block, thereby generating a prediction signal (inter prediction signal). Prediction signal). Inter prediction is performed in units of a current block or a sub-block (for example, 4 × 4 block) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 performs motion estimation in the reference picture for the current block or sub-block. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub-block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) obtained by motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 outputs the generated inter prediction signal to the prediction control unit 128.
 動き補償に用いられた動き情報は信号化される。動きベクトルの信号化には、予測動きベクトル(motion vector predictor)が用いられてもよい。つまり、動きベクトルと予測動きベクトルとの間の差分が信号化されてもよい。 The motion information used for motion compensation is signaled. A motion vector predictor may be used for signalizing the motion vector. That is, the difference between the motion vector and the predicted motion vector may be signaled.
 なお、動き探索により得られたカレントブロックの動き情報だけでなく、隣接ブロックの動き情報も用いて、インター予測信号が生成されてもよい。具体的には、動き探索により得られた動き情報に基づく予測信号と、隣接ブロックの動き情報に基づく予測信号と、を重み付け加算することにより、カレントブロック内のサブブロック単位でインター予測信号が生成されてもよい。このようなインター予測(動き補償)は、OBMC(overlapped block motion compensation)と呼ばれることがある。 Note that an inter prediction signal may be generated using not only the motion information of the current block obtained by motion search but also the motion information of adjacent blocks. Specifically, the inter prediction signal is generated in units of sub-blocks in the current block by weighted addition of the prediction signal based on the motion information obtained by motion search and the prediction signal based on the motion information of adjacent blocks. May be. Such inter prediction (motion compensation) is sometimes called OBMC (overlapped block motion compensation).
 このようなOBMCモードでは、OBMCのためのサブブロックのサイズを示す情報(例えばOBMCブロックサイズと呼ばれる)は、シーケンスレベルで信号化される。また、OBMCモードを適用するか否かを示す情報(例えばOBMCフラグと呼ばれる)は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化のレベルは、シーケンスレベル及びCUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えばピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。 In such an OBMC mode, information indicating the size of a sub-block for OBMC (for example, called OBMC block size) is signaled at the sequence level. Also, information indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC mode (for example, referred to as an OBMC flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the level of signalization of these information does not need to be limited to the sequence level and the CU level, and may be other levels (for example, a picture level, a slice level, a tile level, a CTU level, or a sub-block level). Good.
 OBMCモードについて、より具体的に説明する。図5B及び図5Cは、OBMC処理による予測画像補正処理の概要を説明するためのフローチャート及び概念図である。 The OBMC mode will be described more specifically. FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C are a flowchart and a conceptual diagram for explaining the outline of the predicted image correction process by the OBMC process.
 まず、符号化対象ブロックに割り当てられた動きベクトル(MV)を用いて通常の動き補償による予測画像(Pred)を取得する。 First, a prediction image (Pred) by normal motion compensation is acquired using a motion vector (MV) assigned to an encoding target block.
 次に、符号化済みの左隣接ブロックの動きベクトル(MV_L)を符号化対象ブロックに適用して予測画像(Pred_L)を取得し、前記予測画像とPred_Lとを重みを付けて重ね合わせることで予測画像の1回目の補正を行う。 Next, a prediction image (Pred_L) is obtained by applying the motion vector (MV_L) of the encoded left adjacent block to the encoding target block, and prediction is performed by superimposing the prediction image and Pred_L with weights. Perform the first correction of the image.
 同様に、符号化済みの上隣接ブロックの動きベクトル(MV_U)を符号化対象ブロックに適用して予測画像(Pred_U)を取得し、前記1回目の補正を行った予測画像とPred_Uとを重みを付けて重ね合わせることで予測画像の2回目の補正を行い、それを最終的な予測画像とする。 Similarly, the motion vector (MV_U) of the encoded upper adjacent block is applied to the block to be encoded to obtain a prediction image (Pred_U), and the prediction image and Pred_U that have been subjected to the first correction are weighted. Then, the second correction of the predicted image is performed by superimposing and making it the final predicted image.
 なお、ここでは左隣接ブロックと上隣接ブロックを用いた2段階の補正の方法を説明したが、右隣接ブロックや下隣接ブロックを用いて2段階よりも多い回数の補正を行う構成とすることも可能である。 Although the two-step correction method using the left adjacent block and the upper adjacent block has been described here, the correction may be performed more times than the two steps using the right adjacent block and the lower adjacent block. Is possible.
 なお、重ね合わせを行う領域はブロック全体の画素領域ではなく、ブロック境界近傍の一部の領域のみであってもよい。 Note that the area to be overlapped may not be the pixel area of the entire block, but only a part of the area near the block boundary.
 なお、ここでは1枚の参照ピクチャからの予測画像補正処理について説明したが、複数枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を補正する場合も同様であり、各々の参照ピクチャから補正した予測画像を取得した後に、得られた予測画像をさらに重ね合わせることで最終的な予測画像とする。 Note that here, the predicted image correction processing from one reference picture has been described, but the same applies to the case where a predicted image is corrected from a plurality of reference pictures, and after obtaining a corrected predicted image from each reference picture. Then, the obtained predicted image is further superimposed to obtain a final predicted image.
 なお、前記処理対象ブロックは、予測ブロック単位であっても、予測ブロックをさらに分割したサブブロック単位であってもよい。 The processing target block may be a prediction block unit or a sub-block unit obtained by further dividing the prediction block.
 OBMC処理を適用するかどうかの判定の方法として、例えば、OBMC処理を適用するかどうかを示す信号であるobmc_flagを用いる方法がある。具体的な一例としては、符号化装置において、符号化対象ブロックが動きの複雑な領域に属しているかどうかを判定し、動きの複雑な領域に属している場合はobmc_flagとして値1を設定してOBMC処理を適用して符号化を行い、動きの複雑な領域に属していない場合はobmc_flagとして値0を設定してOBMC処理を適用せずに符号化を行う。一方、復号化装置では、ストリームに記述されたobmc_flagを復号化することで、その値に応じてOBMC処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて復号化を行う。 As a method for determining whether or not to apply the OBMC process, for example, there is a method of using obmc_flag which is a signal indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC process. As a specific example, in the encoding apparatus, it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to a complex motion region, and if it belongs to a complex motion region, a value 1 is set as obmc_flag. Encoding is performed by applying the OBMC process, and if it does not belong to a complex region of motion, the value 0 is set as obmc_flag and the encoding is performed without applying the OBMC process. On the other hand, the decoding device decodes obj_flag described in the stream, and performs decoding by switching whether to apply the OBMC processing according to the value.
 なお、動き情報は信号化されずに、復号装置側で導出されてもよい。例えば、H.265/HEVC規格で規定されたマージモードが用いられてもよい。また例えば、復号装置側で動き探索を行うことにより動き情報が導出されてもよい。この場合、カレントブロックの画素値を用いずに動き探索が行われる。 Note that the motion information may be derived on the decoding device side without being converted into a signal. For example, H.M. A merge mode defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard may be used. Further, for example, the motion information may be derived by performing motion search on the decoding device side. In this case, motion search is performed without using the pixel value of the current block.
 ここで、復号装置側で動き探索を行うモードについて説明する。この復号装置側で動き探索を行うモードは、PMMVD(pattern matched motion vector derivation)モード又はFRUC(frame rate up-conversion)モードと呼ばれることがある。 Here, a mode in which motion search is performed on the decoding device side will be described. The mode in which the motion search is performed on the decoding apparatus side is sometimes called a PMMVD (patterned motion vector derivation) mode or an FRUC (frame rate up-conversion) mode.
 FRUC処理の一例を図5Dに示す。まず、カレントブロックに空間的又は時間的に隣接する符号化済みブロックの動きベクトルを参照して、各々が予測動きベクトルを有する複数の候補のリスト(マージリストと共通であってもよい)が生成される。次に、候補リストに登録されている複数の候補MVの中からベスト候補MVを選択する。例えば、候補リストに含まれる各候補の評価値が算出され、評価値に基づいて1つの候補が選択される。 An example of FRUC processing is shown in FIG. 5D. First, by referring to the motion vector of an encoded block spatially or temporally adjacent to the current block, a list of a plurality of candidates each having a predicted motion vector (may be common with the merge list) is generated Is done. Next, the best candidate MV is selected from a plurality of candidate MVs registered in the candidate list. For example, the evaluation value of each candidate included in the candidate list is calculated, and one candidate is selected based on the evaluation value.
 そして、選択された候補の動きベクトルに基づいて、カレントブロックのための動きベクトルが導出される。具体的には、例えば、選択された候補の動きベクトル(ベスト候補MV)がそのままカレントブロックのための動きベクトルとして導出される。また例えば、選択された候補の動きベクトルに対応する参照ピクチャ内の位置の周辺領域において、パターンマッチングを行うことにより、カレントブロックのための動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。すなわち、ベスト候補MVの周辺の領域に対して同様の方法で探索を行い、さらに評価値が良い値となるMVがあった場合は、ベスト候補MVを前記MVに更新して、それをカレントブロックの最終的なMVとしてもよい。なお、当該処理を実施しない構成とすることも可能である。 Then, a motion vector for the current block is derived based on the selected candidate motion vector. Specifically, for example, the selected candidate motion vector (best candidate MV) is directly derived as a motion vector for the current block. Further, for example, a motion vector for the current block may be derived by performing pattern matching in a peripheral region at a position in the reference picture corresponding to the selected candidate motion vector. That is, the same method is used to search the area around the best candidate MV, and if there is an MV with a better evaluation value, the best candidate MV is updated to the MV, and the current block is updated. The final MV may be used. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the processing is not performed.
 サブブロック単位で処理を行う場合も全く同様の処理としてもよい。 The same processing may be performed when processing is performed in units of sub-blocks.
 なお、評価値は、動きベクトルに対応する参照ピクチャ内の領域と、所定の領域との間のパターンマッチングによって再構成画像の差分値を求めることにより算出される。なお、差分値に加えてそれ以外の情報を用いて評価値を算出してもよい。 Note that the evaluation value is calculated by obtaining a difference value of the reconstructed image by pattern matching between a region in the reference picture corresponding to the motion vector and a predetermined region. Note that the evaluation value may be calculated using information other than the difference value.
 パターンマッチングとしては、第1パターンマッチング又は第2パターンマッチングが用いられる。第1パターンマッチング及び第2パターンマッチングは、それぞれ、バイラテラルマッチング(bilateral matching)及びテンプレートマッチング(template matching)と呼ばれることがある。 As the pattern matching, the first pattern matching or the second pattern matching is used. The first pattern matching and the second pattern matching may be referred to as bilateral matching and template matching, respectively.
 第1パターンマッチングでは、異なる2つの参照ピクチャ内の2つのブロックであってカレントブロックの動き軌道(motion trajectory)に沿う2つのブロックの間でパターンマッチングが行われる。したがって、第1パターンマッチングでは、上述した候補の評価値の算出のための所定の領域として、カレントブロックの動き軌道に沿う他の参照ピクチャ内の領域が用いられる。 In the first pattern matching, pattern matching is performed between two blocks in two different reference pictures that follow the motion trajectory of the current block. Therefore, in the first pattern matching, a region in another reference picture along the motion trajectory of the current block is used as the predetermined region for calculating the candidate evaluation value described above.
 図6は、動き軌道に沿う2つのブロック間でのパターンマッチング(バイラテラルマッチング)の一例を説明するための図である。図6に示すように、第1パターンマッチングでは、カレントブロック(Cur block)の動き軌道に沿う2つのブロックであって異なる2つの参照ピクチャ(Ref0、Ref1)内の2つのブロックのペアの中で最もマッチするペアを探索することにより2つの動きベクトル(MV0、MV1)が導出される。具体的には、カレントブロックに対して、候補MVで指定された第1の符号化済み参照ピクチャ(Ref0)内の指定位置における再構成画像と、前記候補MVを表示時間間隔でスケーリングした対称MVで指定された第2の符号化済み参照ピクチャ(Ref1)内の指定位置における再構成画像との差分を導出し、得られた差分値を用いて評価値を算出する。複数の候補MVの中で最も評価値が良い値となる候補MVを最終MVとして選択するとよい。 FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory. As shown in FIG. 6, in the first pattern matching, two blocks along the motion trajectory of the current block (Cur block) and two blocks in two different reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) are used. By searching for the best matching pair, two motion vectors (MV0, MV1) are derived. Specifically, for the current block, a reconstructed image at a designated position in the first encoded reference picture (Ref0) designated by the candidate MV, and a symmetric MV obtained by scaling the candidate MV at a display time interval. The difference from the reconstructed image at the designated position in the second encoded reference picture (Ref1) designated in (2) is derived, and the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value. The candidate MV having the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs may be selected as the final MV.
 連続的な動き軌道の仮定の下では、2つの参照ブロックを指し示す動きベクトル(MV0、MV1)は、カレントピクチャ(Cur Pic)と2つの参照ピクチャ(Ref0、Ref1)との間の時間的な距離(TD0、TD1)に対して比例する。例えば、カレントピクチャが時間的に2つの参照ピクチャの間に位置し、カレントピクチャから2つの参照ピクチャへの時間的な距離が等しい場合、第1パターンマッチングでは、鏡映対称な双方向の動きベクトルが導出される。 Under the assumption of a continuous motion trajectory, the motion vectors (MV0, MV1) pointing to the two reference blocks are temporal distances between the current picture (Cur Pic) and the two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1). It is proportional to (TD0, TD1). For example, when the current picture is temporally located between two reference pictures and the temporal distances from the current picture to the two reference pictures are equal, the first pattern matching uses a mirror-symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived.
 第2パターンマッチングでは、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレート(カレントピクチャ内でカレントブロックに隣接するブロック(例えば上及び/又は左隣接ブロック))と参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でパターンマッチングが行われる。したがって、第2パターンマッチングでは、上述した候補の評価値の算出のための所定の領域として、カレントピクチャ内のカレントブロックに隣接するブロックが用いられる。 In the second pattern matching, pattern matching is performed between a template in the current picture (a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture (for example, an upper and / or left adjacent block)) and a block in the reference picture. Therefore, in the second pattern matching, a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture is used as the predetermined region for calculating the candidate evaluation value described above.
 図7は、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレートと参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でのパターンマッチング(テンプレートマッチング)の一例を説明するための図である。図7に示すように、第2パターンマッチングでは、カレントピクチャ(Cur Pic)内でカレントブロック(Cur block)に隣接するブロックと最もマッチするブロックを参照ピクチャ(Ref0)内で探索することによりカレントブロックの動きベクトルが導出される。具体的には、カレントブロックに対して、左隣接および上隣接の両方もしくはどちらか一方の符号化済み領域の再構成画像と、候補MVで指定された符号化済み参照ピクチャ(Ref0)内の同等位置における再構成画像との差分を導出し、得られた差分値を用いて評価値を算出し、複数の候補MVの中で最も評価値が良い値となる候補MVをベスト候補MVとして選択するとよい。 FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (template matching) between a template in the current picture and a block in the reference picture. As shown in FIG. 7, in the second pattern matching, the current block is searched by searching the reference picture (Ref0) for the block that most closely matches the block adjacent to the current block (Cur block) in the current picture (Cur Pic). Of motion vectors are derived. Specifically, with respect to the current block, the reconstructed image of the encoded region of the left adjacent area and / or the upper adjacent area, and the equivalent in the encoded reference picture (Ref0) designated by the candidate MV When a difference from the reconstructed image at the position is derived, an evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value, and a candidate MV having the best evaluation value among a plurality of candidate MVs is selected as the best candidate MV. Good.
 このようなFRUCモードを適用するか否かを示す情報(例えばFRUCフラグと呼ばれる)は、CUレベルで信号化される。また、FRUCモードが適用される場合(例えばFRUCフラグが真の場合)、パターンマッチングの方法(第1パターンマッチング又は第2パターンマッチング)を示す情報(例えばFRUCモードフラグと呼ばれる)がCUレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。 Information indicating whether or not to apply such FRUC mode (for example, called FRUC flag) is signaled at the CU level. In addition, when the FRUC mode is applied (for example, when the FRUC flag is true), information indicating the pattern matching method (first pattern matching or second pattern matching) (for example, called the FRUC mode flag) is signaled at the CU level. It becomes. Note that the signalization of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be other levels (for example, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, or sub-block level). .
 ここで、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づいて動きベクトルを導出するモードについて説明する。このモードは、BIO(bi-directional optical flow)モードと呼ばれることがある。 Here, a mode for deriving a motion vector based on a model assuming constant velocity linear motion will be described. This mode may be referred to as a BIO (bi-directional optical flow) mode.
 図8は、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルを説明するための図である。図8において、(vx,vy)は、速度ベクトルを示し、τ0、τ1は、それぞれ、カレントピクチャ(Cur Pic)と2つの参照ピクチャ(Ref0,Ref1)との間の時間的な距離を示す。(MVx0,MVy0)は、参照ピクチャRef0に対応する動きベクトルを示し、(MVx1、MVy1)は、参照ピクチャRef1に対応する動きベクトルを示す。 FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming constant velocity linear motion. In FIG. 8, (vx, vy) indicates a velocity vector, and τ0 and τ1 indicate temporal distances between the current picture (Cur Pic) and two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1), respectively. (MVx0, MVy0) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref0, and (MVx1, MVy1) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref1.
 このとき速度ベクトル(vx,vy)の等速直線運動の仮定の下では、(MVx0,MVy0)及び(MVx1,MVy1)は、それぞれ、(vxτ0,vyτ0)及び(-vxτ1,-vyτ1)と表され、以下のオプティカルフロー等式(1)が成り立つ。 At this time, under the assumption of constant velocity linear motion of the velocity vector (vx, vy), (MVx0, MVy0) and (MVx1, MVy1) are expressed as (vxτ0, vyτ0) and (−vxτ1, -vyτ1), respectively. The following optical flow equation (1) holds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
 ここで、I(k)は、動き補償後の参照画像k(k=0,1)の輝度値を示す。このオプティカルフロー等式は、(i)輝度値の時間微分と、(ii)水平方向の速度及び参照画像の空間勾配の水平成分の積と、(iii)垂直方向の速度及び参照画像の空間勾配の垂直成分の積と、の和が、ゼロと等しいことを示す。このオプティカルフロー等式とエルミート補間(Hermite interpolation)との組み合わせに基づいて、マージリスト等から得られるブロック単位の動きベクトルが画素単位で補正される。 Here, I (k) indicates the luminance value of the reference image k (k = 0, 1) after motion compensation. This optical flow equation consists of (i) the product of the time derivative of the luminance value, (ii) the horizontal component of the horizontal velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image, and (iii) the vertical velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image. Indicates that the sum of the products of the vertical components of is equal to zero. Based on the combination of the optical flow equation and Hermite interpolation, the block-based motion vector obtained from the merge list or the like is corrected in pixel units.
 なお、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づく動きベクトルの導出とは異なる方法で、復号装置側で動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。例えば、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。 Note that the motion vector may be derived on the decoding device side by a method different from the derivation of the motion vector based on the model assuming constant velocity linear motion. For example, a motion vector may be derived for each subblock based on the motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
 ここで、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルを導出するモードについて説明する。このモードは、アフィン動き補償予測(affine motion compensation prediction)モードと呼ばれることがある。 Here, a mode for deriving a motion vector in units of sub-blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks will be described. This mode may be referred to as an affine motion compensation prediction mode.
 図9Aは、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づくサブブロック単位の動きベクトルの導出を説明するための図である。図9Aにおいて、カレントブロックは、16の4x4サブブロックを含む。ここでは、隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてカレントブロックの左上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルv0が導出され、隣接サブブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてカレントブロックの右上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルv1が導出される。そして、2つの動きベクトルv0及びv1を用いて、以下の式(2)により、カレントブロック内の各サブブロックの動きベクトル(vx,vy)が導出される。 FIG. 9A is a diagram for explaining derivation of motion vectors in units of sub-blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. In FIG. 9A, the current block includes 16 4 × 4 sub-blocks. Here, the motion vector v0 of the upper left corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent block, and the motion vector v1 of the upper right corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent subblock. . Then, using the two motion vectors v0 and v1, the motion vector (vx, vy) of each sub-block in the current block is derived by the following equation (2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
 ここで、x及びyは、それぞれ、サブブロックの水平位置及び垂直位置を示し、wは、予め定められた重み係数を示す。 Here, x and y indicate the horizontal position and vertical position of the sub-block, respectively, and w indicates a predetermined weight coefficient.
 このようなアフィン動き補償予測モードでは、左上及び右上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルの導出方法が異なるいくつかのモードを含んでもよい。このようなアフィン動き補償予測モードを示す情報(例えばアフィンフラグと呼ばれる)は、CUレベルで信号化される。なお、このアフィン動き補償予測モードを示す情報の信号化は、CUレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル(例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、CTUレベル又はサブブロックレベル)であってもよい。 Such an affine motion compensation prediction mode may include several modes in which the motion vector derivation methods of the upper left and upper right corner control points are different. Information indicating such an affine motion compensation prediction mode (for example, called an affine flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the information indicating the affine motion compensation prediction mode need not be limited to the CU level, but other levels (for example, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, or sub-block level). ).
 [予測制御部]
 予測制御部128は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として減算部104及び加算部116に出力する。
[Prediction control unit]
The prediction control unit 128 selects either the intra prediction signal or the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the subtraction unit 104 and the addition unit 116 as a prediction signal.
 ここで、マージモードにより符号化対象ピクチャの動きベクトルを導出する例を説明する。図9Bは、マージモードによる動きベクトル導出処理の概要を説明するための図である。 Here, an example of deriving the motion vector of the encoding target picture by the merge mode will be described. FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining the outline of the motion vector deriving process in the merge mode.
 まず、予測MVの候補を登録した予測MVリストを生成する。予測MVの候補としては、符号化対象ブロックの空間的に周辺に位置する複数の符号化済みブロックが持つMVである空間隣接予測MV、符号化済み参照ピクチャにおける符号化対象ブロックの位置を投影した近辺のブロックが持つMVである時間隣接予測MV、空間隣接予測MVと時間隣接予測MVのMV値を組合わせて生成したMVである結合予測MV、および値がゼロのMVであるゼロ予測MV等がある。 First, a prediction MV list in which prediction MV candidates are registered is generated. As prediction MV candidates, spatial adjacent prediction MVs that are MVs of a plurality of encoded blocks located spatially around the encoding target block, and the position of the encoding target block in the encoded reference picture are projected. Temporal adjacent prediction MV that is MV of neighboring blocks, combined prediction MV that is MV generated by combining MV values of spatial adjacent prediction MV and temporal adjacent prediction MV, zero prediction MV that is MV having a value of zero, and the like There is.
 次に、予測MVリストに登録されている複数の予測MVの中から1つの予測MVを選択することで、符号化対象ブロックのMVとして決定する。 Next, by selecting one prediction MV from a plurality of prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list, it is determined as the MV of the block to be encoded.
 さらに可変長符号化部では、どの予測MVを選択したかを示す信号であるmerge_idxをストリームに記述して符号化する。 Further, the variable length encoding unit describes and encodes merge_idx which is a signal indicating which prediction MV is selected in the stream.
 なお、図9Bで説明した予測MVリストに登録する予測MVは一例であり、図中の個数とは異なる個数であったり、図中の予測MVの一部の種類を含まない構成であったり、図中の予測MVの種類以外の予測MVを追加した構成であったりしてもよい。 Note that the prediction MV registered in the prediction MV list described with reference to FIG. 9B is an example, and the number of prediction MVs may be different from the number in the figure, or may not include some types of prediction MVs in the figure. It may be the composition which added prediction MV other than the kind of prediction MV in a figure.
 なお、マージモードにより導出した符号化対象ブロックのMVを用いて、後述するDMVR処理を行うことによって最終的なMVを決定してもよい。 It should be noted that the final MV may be determined by performing DMVR processing, which will be described later, using the MV of the encoding target block derived by the merge mode.
 ここで、DMVR処理を用いてMVを決定する例について説明する。 Here, an example in which MV is determined using DMVR processing will be described.
 図9Cは、DMVR処理の概要を説明するための概念図である。 FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of DMVR processing.
 まず、処理対象ブロックに設定された最適MVPを候補MVとして、前記候補MVに従って、L0方向の処理済みピクチャである第1参照ピクチャ、およびL1方向の処理済みピクチャである第2参照ピクチャから参照画素をそれぞれ取得し、各参照画素の平均をとることでテンプレートを生成する。 First, the optimal MVP set in the processing target block is set as a candidate MV, and reference pixels from a first reference picture that is a processed picture in the L0 direction and a second reference picture that is a processed picture in the L1 direction are set according to the candidate MV. Are obtained, and a template is generated by taking the average of each reference pixel.
 次に、前記テンプレートを用いて、第1参照ピクチャおよび第2参照ピクチャの候補MVの周辺領域をそれぞれ探索し、最もコストが最小となるMVを最終的なMVとして決定する。なお、コスト値はテンプレートの各画素値と探索領域の各画素値との差分値およびMV値等を用いて算出する。 Next, using the template, the peripheral areas of the candidate MVs of the first reference picture and the second reference picture are searched, respectively, and the MV with the lowest cost is determined as the final MV. The cost value is calculated using a difference value between each pixel value of the template and each pixel value of the search area, an MV value, and the like.
 なお、符号化装置および復号化装置では、ここで説明した処理の概要は基本的に共通である。 Note that the outline of the processing described here is basically the same in the encoding device and the decoding device.
 なお、ここで説明した処理そのものでなくても、候補MVの周辺を探索して最終的なMVを導出することができる処理であれば、他の処理を用いてもよい。 Note that other processes may be used as long as they are processes that can search the vicinity of the candidate MV and derive the final MV, instead of the process described here.
 ここで、LIC処理を用いて予測画像を生成するモードについて説明する。 Here, a mode for generating a predicted image using LIC processing will be described.
 図9Dは、LIC処理による輝度補正処理を用いた予測画像生成方法の概要を説明するための図である。 FIG. 9D is a diagram for explaining an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
 まず、符号化済みピクチャである参照ピクチャから符号化対象ブロックに対応する参照画像を取得するためのMVを導出する。 First, an MV for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a block to be encoded is derived from a reference picture that is an encoded picture.
 次に、符号化対象ブロックに対して、左隣接および上隣接の符号化済み周辺参照領域の輝度画素値と、MVで指定された参照ピクチャ内の同等位置における輝度画素値とを用いて、参照ピクチャと符号化対象ピクチャとで輝度値がどのように変化したかを示す情報を抽出して輝度補正パラメータを算出する。 Next, for the encoding target block, reference is made using the luminance pixel values of the left and upper adjacent encoded peripheral reference regions and the luminance pixel value at the equivalent position in the reference picture specified by MV. Information indicating how the luminance value has changed between the picture and the picture to be encoded is extracted to calculate a luminance correction parameter.
 MVで指定された参照ピクチャ内の参照画像に対して前記輝度補正パラメータを用いて輝度補正処理を行うことで、符号化対象ブロックに対する予測画像を生成する。 The predicted image for the encoding target block is generated by performing the brightness correction process using the brightness correction parameter for the reference image in the reference picture specified by MV.
 なお、図9Dにおける前記周辺参照領域の形状は一例であり、これ以外の形状を用いてもよい。 Note that the shape of the peripheral reference region in FIG. 9D is an example, and other shapes may be used.
 また、ここでは1枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を生成する処理について説明したが、複数枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を生成する場合も同様であり、各々の参照ピクチャから取得した参照画像に同様の方法で輝度補正処理を行ってから予測画像を生成する。 Further, here, the process of generating a predicted image from one reference picture has been described, but the same applies to the case of generating a predicted image from a plurality of reference pictures, and the same applies to reference images acquired from each reference picture. The predicted image is generated after performing the luminance correction processing by the method.
 LIC処理を適用するかどうかの判定の方法として、例えば、LIC処理を適用するかどうかを示す信号であるlic_flagを用いる方法がある。具体的な一例としては、符号化装置において、符号化対象ブロックが輝度変化が発生している領域に属しているかどうかを判定し、輝度変化が発生している領域に属している場合はlic_flagとして値1を設定してLIC処理を適用して符号化を行い、輝度変化が発生している領域に属していない場合はlic_flagとして値0を設定してLIC処理を適用せずに符号化を行う。一方、復号化装置では、ストリームに記述されたlic_flagを復号化することで、その値に応じてLIC処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて復号化を行う。 As a method for determining whether to apply LIC processing, for example, there is a method of using lic_flag, which is a signal indicating whether to apply LIC processing. As a specific example, in the encoding device, it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to an area where the luminance change occurs, and if it belongs to the area where the luminance change occurs, lic_flag is set. Encode by applying LIC processing with a value of 1 set, and if not belonging to an area where a luminance change has occurred, set 0 as lic_flag and perform encoding without applying the LIC processing . On the other hand, the decoding apparatus decodes lic_flag described in the stream, thereby switching whether to apply the LIC processing according to the value, and performing decoding.
 LIC処理を適用するかどうかの判定の別の方法として、例えば、周辺ブロックでLIC処理を適用したかどうかに従って判定する方法もある。具体的な一例としては、符号化対象ブロックがマージモードであった場合、マージモード処理におけるMVの導出の際に選択した周辺の符号化済みブロックがLIC処理を適用して符号化したかどうかを判定し、その結果に応じてLIC処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて符号化を行う。なお、この例の場合、復号化における処理も全く同様となる。 As another method for determining whether or not to apply LIC processing, for example, there is a method for determining whether or not LIC processing has been applied to peripheral blocks. As a specific example, when the encoding target block is in the merge mode, whether or not the surrounding encoded blocks selected in the derivation of the MV in the merge mode processing are encoded by applying the LIC processing. Judgment is performed, and encoding is performed by switching whether to apply the LIC processing according to the result. In this example, the decoding process is exactly the same.
 [復号装置の概要]
 次に、上記の符号化装置100から出力された符号化信号(符号化ビットストリーム)を復号可能な復号装置の概要について説明する。図10は、実施の形態1に係る復号装置200の機能構成を示すブロック図である。復号装置200は、動画像/画像をブロック単位で復号する動画像/画像復号装置である。
[Outline of Decoding Device]
Next, an outline of a decoding apparatus capable of decoding the encoded signal (encoded bit stream) output from the encoding apparatus 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of decoding apparatus 200 according to Embodiment 1. The decoding device 200 is a moving image / image decoding device that decodes moving images / images in units of blocks.
 図10に示すように、復号装置200は、エントロピー復号部202と、逆量子化部204と、逆変換部206と、加算部208と、ブロックメモリ210と、ループフィルタ部212と、フレームメモリ214と、イントラ予測部216と、インター予測部218と、予測制御部220と、を備える。 As illustrated in FIG. 10, the decoding device 200 includes an entropy decoding unit 202, an inverse quantization unit 204, an inverse transformation unit 206, an addition unit 208, a block memory 210, a loop filter unit 212, and a frame memory 214. And an intra prediction unit 216, an inter prediction unit 218, and a prediction control unit 220.
 復号装置200は、例えば、汎用プロセッサ及びメモリにより実現される。この場合、メモリに格納されたソフトウェアプログラムがプロセッサにより実行されたときに、プロセッサは、エントロピー復号部202、逆量子化部204、逆変換部206、加算部208、ループフィルタ部212、イントラ予測部216、インター予測部218及び予測制御部220として機能する。また、復号装置200は、エントロピー復号部202、逆量子化部204、逆変換部206、加算部208、ループフィルタ部212、イントラ予測部216、インター予測部218及び予測制御部220に対応する専用の1以上の電子回路として実現されてもよい。 The decoding device 200 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the software program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the processor executes the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse transformation unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, and the intra prediction unit. 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220. Also, the decoding apparatus 200 is dedicated to the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse transformation unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220. It may be realized as one or more electronic circuits.
 以下に、復号装置200に含まれる各構成要素について説明する。 Hereinafter, each component included in the decoding device 200 will be described.
 [エントロピー復号部]
 エントロピー復号部202は、符号化ビットストリームをエントロピー復号する。具体的には、エントロピー復号部202は、例えば、符号化ビットストリームから二値信号に算術復号する。そして、エントロピー復号部202は、二値信号を多値化(debinarize)する。これにより、エントロピー復号部202は、ブロック単位で量子化係数を逆量子化部204に出力する。
[Entropy decoding unit]
The entropy decoding unit 202 performs entropy decoding on the encoded bit stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit 202 performs arithmetic decoding from a coded bitstream to a binary signal, for example. Then, the entropy decoding unit 202 debinarizes the binary signal. As a result, the entropy decoding unit 202 outputs the quantized coefficient to the inverse quantization unit 204 in units of blocks.
 [逆量子化部]
 逆量子化部204は、エントロピー復号部202からの入力である復号対象ブロック(以下、カレントブロックという)の量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部204は、カレントブロックの量子化係数の各々について、当該量子化係数に対応する量子化パラメータに基づいて当該量子化係数を逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部204は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された量子化係数(つまり変換係数)を逆変換部206に出力する。
[Inverse quantization unit]
The inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of a decoding target block (hereinafter referred to as a current block) that is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes each quantization coefficient of the current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the quantization coefficient. Then, the inverse quantization unit 204 outputs the quantization coefficient (that is, the transform coefficient) obtained by inverse quantization of the current block to the inverse transform unit 206.
 [逆変換部]
 逆変換部206は、逆量子化部204からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。
[Inverse conversion part]
The inverse transform unit 206 restores the prediction error by inverse transforming the transform coefficient that is an input from the inverse quantization unit 204.
 例えば符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がEMT又はAMTを適用することを示す場合(例えばAMTフラグが真)、逆変換部206は、読み解かれた変換タイプを示す情報に基づいてカレントブロックの変換係数を逆変換する。 For example, when the information read from the encoded bit stream indicates that EMT or AMT is applied (for example, the AMT flag is true), the inverse conversion unit 206 determines the current block based on the information indicating the read conversion type. Inversely transform the conversion coefficient of.
 また例えば、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がNSSTを適用することを示す場合、逆変換部206は、変換係数に逆再変換を適用する。 Also, for example, when the information read from the encoded bitstream indicates that NSST is applied, the inverse transform unit 206 applies inverse retransformation to the transform coefficient.
 [加算部]
 加算部208は、逆変換部206からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部220からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部208は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ210及びループフィルタ部212に出力する。
[Addition part]
The adder 208 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error input from the inverse converter 206 and the prediction sample input from the prediction controller 220. Then, the adding unit 208 outputs the reconfigured block to the block memory 210 and the loop filter unit 212.
 [ブロックメモリ]
 ブロックメモリ210は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって復号対象ピクチャ(以下、カレントピクチャという)内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ210は、加算部208から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。
[Block memory]
The block memory 210 is a storage unit for storing a block that is referred to in intra prediction and that is within a decoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as a current picture). Specifically, the block memory 210 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 208.
 [ループフィルタ部]
 ループフィルタ部212は、加算部208によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ214及び表示装置等に出力する。
[Loop filter section]
The loop filter unit 212 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 208, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 214, the display device, and the like.
 符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれたALFのオン/オフを示す情報がALFのオンを示す場合、局所的な勾配の方向及び活性度に基づいて複数のフィルタの中から1つのフィルタが選択され、選択されたフィルタが再構成ブロックに適用される。 If the ALF on / off information read from the encoded bitstream indicates ALF on, one filter is selected from the plurality of filters based on the local gradient direction and activity, The selected filter is applied to the reconstruction block.
 [フレームメモリ]
 フレームメモリ214は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ214は、ループフィルタ部212によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。
[Frame memory]
The frame memory 214 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and is sometimes called a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 214 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 212.
 [イントラ予測部]
 イントラ予測部216は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれたイントラ予測モードに基づいて、ブロックメモリ210に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してイントラ予測を行うことで、予測信号(イントラ予測信号)を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部216は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル(例えば輝度値、色差値)を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部220に出力する。
[Intra prediction section]
The intra prediction unit 216 performs intra prediction with reference to the block in the current picture stored in the block memory 210 based on the intra prediction mode read from the encoded bitstream, so that a prediction signal (intra prediction Signal). Specifically, the intra prediction unit 216 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to a sample (for example, luminance value and color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to the unit 220.
 なお、色差ブロックのイントラ予測において輝度ブロックを参照するイントラ予測モードが選択されている場合は、イントラ予測部216は、カレントブロックの輝度成分に基づいて、カレントブロックの色差成分を予測してもよい。 In addition, when the intra prediction mode that refers to the luminance block is selected in the intra prediction of the color difference block, the intra prediction unit 216 may predict the color difference component of the current block based on the luminance component of the current block. .
 また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がPDPCの適用を示す場合、イントラ予測部216は、水平/垂直方向の参照画素の勾配に基づいてイントラ予測後の画素値を補正する。 In addition, when the information read from the encoded bitstream indicates application of PDPC, the intra prediction unit 216 corrects the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical direction.
 [インター予測部]
 インター予測部218は、フレームメモリ214に格納された参照ピクチャを参照して、カレントブロックを予測する。予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック(例えば4x4ブロック)の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部218は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた動き情報(例えば動きベクトル)を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成し、インター予測信号を予測制御部220に出力する。
[Inter prediction section]
The inter prediction unit 218 refers to the reference picture stored in the frame memory 214 and predicts the current block. Prediction is performed in units of a current block or a sub-block (for example, 4 × 4 block) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 218 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub-block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) read from the encoded bitstream, and generates the inter prediction signal. The result is output to the prediction control unit 220.
 なお、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がOBMCモードを適用することを示す場合、インター予測部218は、動き探索により得られたカレントブロックの動き情報だけでなく、隣接ブロックの動き情報も用いて、インター予測信号を生成する。 When the information read from the encoded bitstream indicates that the OBMC mode is to be applied, the inter prediction unit 218 includes not only the motion information of the current block obtained by motion search but also the motion information of adjacent blocks. To generate an inter prediction signal.
 また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がFRUCモードを適用することを示す場合、インター予測部218は、符号化ストリームから読み解かれたパターンマッチングの方法(バイラテラルマッチング又はテンプレートマッチング)に従って動き探索を行うことにより動き情報を導出する。そして、インター予測部218は、導出された動き情報を用いて動き補償を行う。 Also, when the information read from the encoded bitstream indicates that the FRUC mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 follows the pattern matching method (bilateral matching or template matching) read from the encoded stream. Motion information is derived by performing motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion compensation using the derived motion information.
 また、インター予測部218は、BIOモードが適用される場合に、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づいて動きベクトルを導出する。また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がアフィン動き補償予測モードを適用することを示す場合には、インター予測部218は、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルを導出する。 In addition, when the BIO mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 derives a motion vector based on a model assuming constant velocity linear motion. Also, when the information read from the encoded bitstream indicates that the affine motion compensated prediction mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 determines the motion vector in units of subblocks based on the motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. Is derived.
 [予測制御部]
 予測制御部220は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として加算部208に出力する。
[Prediction control unit]
The prediction control unit 220 selects either the intra prediction signal or the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the adding unit 208 as a prediction signal.
 [符号化装置のインター予測部の内部構成]
 図11Aは、実施の形態における現ブロック及び参照可能領域を示す図である。符号化装置100では、上述したように、IBCと呼ばれる、現ブロック12を含むピクチャであるカレントピクチャ内の復号済みの画素を参照する処理を行うことができる。IBCは、通常のインター予測のモードのうちの一つとして用いられることが可能であり、マージモード、ノーマルインターモード及びスキップモード等と共に用いられることができる。よって、符号化装置100は、符号化対象ピクチャと時間順において近接した、符号化済みのピクチャ又は符号化が完了していないピクチャを参照ピクチャとして用いるだけでなく、IBCも利用することが可能である。
[Internal configuration of inter prediction unit of encoding apparatus]
FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating a current block and a referenceable area in the embodiment. As described above, the encoding apparatus 100 can perform a process referred to as IBC that refers to a decoded pixel in a current picture that is a picture including the current block 12. The IBC can be used as one of normal inter prediction modes, and can be used together with a merge mode, a normal inter mode, a skip mode, and the like. Therefore, the encoding apparatus 100 can use not only an encoded picture or a picture that has not been encoded, which is close in time order to the encoding target picture, as a reference picture, but can also use IBC. is there.
 図11Aにおいて、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズをWcとする。また、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズをHcとする。 In FIG. 11A, the horizontal size of the current block 12 is Wc. Further, the vertical size of the current block 12 is assumed to be Hc.
 IBCにおいて、画素を参照できる領域である参照可能領域20は、図11Aに示されるように、現ブロック12の左側のうち、現ブロック12の下辺より上側、又は、現ブロックの上側に位置する。つまり、参照可能領域20は、現ブロック12より先に符号化された領域である。これは、現ブロック12が参照できる画素は、復号済みの画素であるためである。 In IBC, the referable area 20 which is an area where pixels can be referred to is located on the left side of the current block 12 above the lower side of the current block 12 or above the current block, as shown in FIG. 11A. That is, the referenceable area 20 is an area encoded before the current block 12. This is because pixels that can be referred to by the current block 12 are decoded pixels.
 なお、現ブロック12は、符号化装置100においては現ブロックであり、復号装置200においては、復号対象ブロックである。 Note that the current block 12 is the current block in the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding target block in the decoding apparatus 200.
 図11Bは、実施の形態におけるブロックベクトルを表した図である。IBCでは、カレントピクチャ内において、現ブロックと参照ブロックとの位置の変位を表すベクトルを、ブロックベクトル(BV)と呼ぶ。ブロックベクトルの原点は、例えば、現ブロック12の右上の角の画素である。また、例えば、ブロックベクトルの原点は、現ブロック12の左上の角の画素でもよいし、現ブロック12の右下の画素でもよいし、現ブロック12の左下の画素でもよい。なお、ブロックベクトルは、動きベクトルと呼ばれる場合もある。 FIG. 11B shows a block vector in the embodiment. In IBC, a vector representing a displacement of the position between the current block and the reference block in the current picture is called a block vector (BV). The origin of the block vector is, for example, the upper right corner pixel of the current block 12. Further, for example, the origin of the block vector may be the pixel at the upper left corner of the current block 12, the lower right pixel of the current block 12, or the lower left pixel of the current block 12. The block vector is sometimes called a motion vector.
 図11Bに示すように、ブロックベクトルは、例えば、現ブロック12の右上の角の画素と参照ブロック30の右上の角の画素とを結んだベクトルとなる。また、図11Bに示すように、ブロックベクトルの水平方向の成分を表すベクトルをBVxとし、ブロックベクトルの垂直方向の成分を表すベクトルをBVyとする。例えば、ブロックベクトルは、現ブロック12の左上の角の画素と参照ブロック30の左上の角の画素とを結んだベクトルであってもよい。また、例えば、ブロックベクトルは、現ブロック12の右下の角の画素と参照ブロック30の右下の角の画素とを結んだベクトルであってもよい。また、例えば、ブロックベクトルは、現ブロック12の左下の角の画素と参照ブロック30の左下の角の画素とを結んだベクトルであってもよい。 As shown in FIG. 11B, the block vector is, for example, a vector connecting the upper right corner pixel of the current block 12 and the upper right corner pixel of the reference block 30. Also, as shown in FIG. 11B, a vector representing the horizontal component of the block vector is BVx, and a vector representing the vertical component of the block vector is BVy. For example, the block vector may be a vector connecting the pixel at the upper left corner of the current block 12 and the pixel at the upper left corner of the reference block 30. Further, for example, the block vector may be a vector connecting the pixel at the lower right corner of the current block 12 and the pixel at the lower right corner of the reference block 30. Further, for example, the block vector may be a vector connecting the pixel at the lower left corner of the current block 12 and the pixel at the lower left corner of the reference block 30.
 図12Aは、実施の形態におけるブロックベクトルの水平成分が現ブロックの水平方向のサイズ以下である場合を示した図である。また、図12Bは、実施の形態におけるブロックベクトルの垂直成分が現ブロックの垂直方向のサイズより小さい場合を示した図である。図12A及び図12Bにおいて、ブロックベクトルの垂直方向の正の方向を、上方向とする。また、図12A及び図12Bにおいて、ブロックベクトルの水平方向の正の方向を、左方向とする。 FIG. 12A is a diagram showing a case where the horizontal component of the block vector in the embodiment is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block. FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating a case where the vertical component of the block vector in the embodiment is smaller than the size of the current block in the vertical direction. In FIGS. 12A and 12B, the positive direction of the block vector in the vertical direction is defined as the upward direction. In FIGS. 12A and 12B, the horizontal positive direction of the block vector is the left direction.
 参照ブロック30が、図11Aで示した参照可能領域20の中に存在するとき、以下の条件が想定される。 When the reference block 30 exists in the referable area 20 shown in FIG. 11A, the following conditions are assumed.
 (ケース1)BVx≦Wcであれば、BVy>Hc(図12Aで図示)
 (ケース2)BVy<Hcであれば、BVx>Wc(図12Bで図示)
(Case 1) If BVx ≦ Wc, BVy> Hc (shown in FIG. 12A)
(Case 2) If BVy <Hc, BVx> Wc (shown in FIG. 12B)
 ケース1は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズWc以下であれば、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズHcより大きいことを示している。ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズWc以下であるとき、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズHcより大きいため、BVy′=BVy-Hcとする。これにより、符号化装置100は、BVyの値をそのまま符号化するのではなく、BVyからオフセット値であるHcを減算した値であるBVy′を符号化する。BVyからオフセット値を減算することで、BVy′は、BVyよりも各成分を表現するために必要なビット数が少なくなる。これにより、符号化装置100は、符号量を削減することができる。 Case 1 indicates that if the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size Wc of the current block 12, the vertical component BVy of the block vector is larger than the vertical size Hc of the current block 12. . When the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is less than or equal to the horizontal size Wc of the current block 12, the vertical component BVy of the block vector is larger than the vertical size Hc of the current block 12, so BVy ′ = BVy−Hc To do. As a result, the encoding apparatus 100 does not encode the value of BVy as it is, but encodes BVy ′ that is a value obtained by subtracting the offset value Hc from BVy. By subtracting the offset value from BVy, BVy ′ requires fewer bits to represent each component than BVy. Thereby, the encoding apparatus 100 can reduce the amount of codes.
 ケース2は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズHcより小さければ、ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズWcより大きいことを示している。ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズHcより小さいとき、ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズWcより大きいため、BVx′=BVx-Wcとする。これにより、符号化装置100は、BVxの値をそのまま符号化するのではなく、BVxからオフセット値であるWcを減算した値であるBVx′を符号化する。BVxからオフセット値を減算することで、BVx′は、BVxよりも各成分を表現するために必要なビット数が少なくなる。これにより、符号化装置100は、符号量を削減することができる。 Case 2 indicates that if the vertical component BVy of the block vector is smaller than the vertical size Hc of the current block 12, the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is larger than the horizontal size Wc of the current block 12. When the vertical component BVy of the block vector is smaller than the vertical size Hc of the current block 12, since the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is larger than the horizontal size Wc of the current block 12, BVx ′ = BVx−Wc. . Thereby, the encoding apparatus 100 does not encode the value of BVx as it is, but encodes BVx ′ that is a value obtained by subtracting the offset value Wc from BVx. By subtracting the offset value from BVx, BVx ′ requires fewer bits to represent each component than BVx. Thereby, the encoding apparatus 100 can reduce the amount of codes.
 BVxの次にBVyを符号化するという順序で符号化を行う場合、BVxの値がケース1の条件に当てはまるか否かの判定結果に基づいて、BVyの値がケース1の条件に当てはまるか否かを判定できる。そのため、BVxの値がケース1の条件に当てはまる場合には、符号化時に、BVyの代わりにBVy′を符号化することができる。また、この場合、復号時には、復号装置200は、BVy′にオフセット値であるHcを加算して、BVyを取得することが可能である。 When encoding is performed in the order of encoding BVy after BVx, whether or not the value of BVy meets the condition of case 1 based on the determination result of whether or not the value of BVx meets the condition of case 1 Can be determined. For this reason, when the value of BVx satisfies the condition of case 1, BVy ′ can be encoded instead of BVy at the time of encoding. Further, in this case, at the time of decoding, the decoding apparatus 200 can obtain BVy by adding Hc that is an offset value to BVy ′.
 また、BVyの次にBVxを符号化するという順序で符号化を行う場合、BVyの値がケース2の条件に当てはまるか否かの判定結果に基づいて、BVxの値がケース2の条件に当てはまるか否かを判定できる。そのため、BVyの値がケース2の条件に当てはまる場合には、符号化時に、BVxの代わりにBVx′を符号化することができる。また、この場合、復号時には、復号装置200は、BVx′にオフセット値であるWcを加算して、BVxを取得することが可能である。 Further, when encoding is performed in the order of encoding BVx after BVy, the value of BVx matches the condition of Case 2 based on the determination result of whether or not the value of BVy meets the condition of Case 2. It can be determined whether or not. For this reason, when the value of BVy satisfies the condition of case 2, BVx ′ can be encoded instead of BVx at the time of encoding. Also, in this case, at the time of decoding, the decoding apparatus 200 can acquire BVx by adding Wc that is an offset value to BVx ′.
 なお、ブロックベクトルの符号化において、採用される手法は、BVxまたはBVyの値を示す情報を符号化する手法に限らない。例えば、現ブロック12の周辺のIBCモードで符号化されたブロックにおけるブロックベクトルから予測ベクトルを生成し、当該予測ベクトルと、現ブロック12におけるブロックベクトルとの差分値を符号化してもよい。 It should be noted that the method employed in the encoding of the block vector is not limited to the method of encoding the information indicating the value of BVx or BVy. For example, a prediction vector may be generated from a block vector in a block encoded in the IBC mode around the current block 12, and a difference value between the prediction vector and the block vector in the current block 12 may be encoded.
 より具体的には、現ブロック12の隣接ブロックにIBCモードで符号化されたブロックが存在する場合、当該隣接ブロックにおけるブロックベクトルと現ブロック12におけるブロックベクトルとの差分値を符号化する。現ブロック12の隣接ブロックにIBCモードで符号化されたブロックが存在しない場合、現ブロック12におけるブロックベクトルの各成分から、オフセット値である現ブロック12の水平方向又は垂直方向のサイズを減算した値を、符号化する。また、現ブロック12におけるブロックベクトルの各成分をオフセット値によって表現した値を、符号化してもよい。 More specifically, when there is a block encoded in the IBC mode in the adjacent block of the current block 12, the difference value between the block vector in the adjacent block and the block vector in the current block 12 is encoded. A value obtained by subtracting the horizontal or vertical size of the current block 12 as an offset value from each component of the block vector in the current block 12 when there is no block encoded in the IBC mode in the adjacent block of the current block 12 Is encoded. Also, a value expressing each component of the block vector in the current block 12 by an offset value may be encoded.
 上記に記載の各方法により符号化を行うことで、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの各成分を表現するために必要なビット数を削減できる。よって、符号化装置100は、符号化処理において、符号量を削減できる可能性がある。 By performing the encoding by each method described above, the encoding apparatus 100 can reduce the number of bits necessary for expressing each component of the block vector. Therefore, the encoding apparatus 100 may be able to reduce the code amount in the encoding process.
 図13は、実施の形態におけるインター予測部においてIBCモードで符号化する符号化装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of an encoding apparatus that performs encoding in the IBC mode in the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment.
 まず、符号化装置100は、現ブロック12をIBCモードで符号化するか否かを判断する(ステップS1000)。 First, the encoding apparatus 100 determines whether or not to encode the current block 12 in the IBC mode (step S1000).
 符号化装置100が、現ブロック12をIBCモードで符号化しないと判断した場合(ステップS1000でNo)、符号化装置100は動作を終了する。 When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the current block 12 is not encoded in the IBC mode (No in step S1000), the encoding apparatus 100 ends the operation.
 符号化装置100が、現ブロック12をIBCモードで符号化すると判断した場合(ステップS1000でYes)、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分を示す情報を符号化する(ステップS1001)。ここで、第1の方向とは、水平方向であってもよいし、垂直方向であってもよい。ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分を示す情報とは、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分であってもよい。 When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the current block 12 is to be encoded in the IBC mode (Yes in step S1000), the encoding apparatus 100 encodes information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector (step S100). S1001). Here, the first direction may be a horizontal direction or a vertical direction. The information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector may be a component in the first direction of the block vector.
 次に、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分の値が所定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する(ステップS1002)。ここで、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズ以下であることであってもよい。なお、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズより小さいことであってもよい。また、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズ以下であることであってもよい。なお、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズより小さいことであってもよい。また、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことでもよい。これにより、符号化装置100は、現ブロック12と異なるブロックの一部が、参照可能領域20の下限よりも、下に存在するときに、当該ブロックを参照することを避けることができる。つまり、IBCにおいて、参照ブロック30が、参照可能領域20より下に存在する場合を排除することができる。 Next, the encoding apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector satisfies a predetermined condition (step S1002). Here, the predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12. The predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12. The predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction. The predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction. Further, the predetermined condition may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value. Thereby, the encoding apparatus 100 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block 12 exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area 20. That is, the case where the reference block 30 exists below the referenceable area 20 in the IBC can be excluded.
 符号化装置100が、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分の値が所定の条件を満たすと判断した場合(ステップS1002でYes)、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分からオフセット値を減算した値を、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報として符号化する(ステップS1003)。ここで、第2の方向とは、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち、第1の方向と異なる方向である。また、オフセット値は、第2の方向における現ブロック12のサイズを示す値でもよい。また、オフセット値は、予め定められた所定の値でもよい。 When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector satisfies the predetermined condition (Yes in step S1002), the encoding apparatus 100 determines from the component in the second direction of the block vector. The value obtained by subtracting the offset value is encoded as information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector (step S1003). Here, the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The offset value may be a value indicating the size of the current block 12 in the second direction. The offset value may be a predetermined value.
 符号化装置100が、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分の値が所定の条件を満たさないと判断した場合(ステップS1002でNo)、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報を符号化する(ステップS1004)。ここで、第2の方向とは、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち、第1の方向と異なる方向である。また、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分でもよい。 When encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector does not satisfy the predetermined condition (No in step S1002), encoding apparatus 100 determines that the component in the second direction of the block vector. Is encoded (step S1004). Here, the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector may be a component in the second direction of the block vector.
 ここで、符号化装置100は動作を終了する。 Here, the encoding device 100 ends the operation.
 なお、図12Aで示されたケース1の条件に当てはまる場合は、第1の方向は、ブロックベクトルの水平方向とされる。また、図12Bで示されたケース2の条件に当てはまる場合は、第1の方向は、ブロックベクトルの垂直方向とされる。 In addition, when the condition of case 1 shown in FIG. 12A is applied, the first direction is the horizontal direction of the block vector. Further, when the condition of case 2 shown in FIG. 12B is satisfied, the first direction is the vertical direction of the block vector.
 例えば、符号化装置100は、第1の方向がブロックベクトルの水平方向である場合、ブロックベクトルの水平成分の値に応じて、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分からオフセット値を減算した値をブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報として用いるか否かを判断する。符号化装置100がブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの垂直成分として用いると判断した場合、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分からオフセット値を減算した値を符号化する。符号化装置100が、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報として用いないと判断した場合、符号化装置100は、オフセット値を考慮せずに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を符号化する。つまり、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分からオフセット値を減算せずに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を符号化する。ここで、オフセット値は、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズでもよい。また、オフセット値は、予め定められた所定の値でもよい。 For example, when the first direction is the horizontal direction of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 uses a value obtained by subtracting the offset value from the vertical component of the block vector according to the horizontal component value of the block vector. It is determined whether to use as information indicating the component. When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is used as the vertical component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 subtracts the offset value from the vertical component of the block vector. Encode the value. When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is not used as the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 does not consider the offset value. Next, the vertical component of the block vector is encoded. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 encodes the vertical component of the block vector without subtracting the offset value from the vertical component of the block vector. Here, the offset value may be the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction. The offset value may be a predetermined value.
 また、例えば、符号化装置100は、第1の方向がブロックベクトルの垂直方向である場合、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分の値に応じて、ブロックベクトルの水平成分からオフセット値を減算した値をブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報として用いるか否かを判断する。符号化装置100が、ブロックベクトルの水平成分にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報として用いると判断した場合、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分からオフセット値を減算した値を符号化する。符号化装置100が、ブロックベクトルの水平成分にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報として用いないと判断した場合、符号化装置100は、オフセット値を考慮せずに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を符号化する。つまり、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分からオフセット値を減算せずに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を符号化する。ここで、オフセット値は、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズでもよい。また、オフセット値は、予め定められた所定の値でもよい。 Further, for example, when the first direction is the vertical direction of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 uses a value obtained by subtracting the offset value from the horizontal component of the block vector according to the value of the vertical component of the block vector. It is determined whether or not it is used as information indicating the horizontal component. When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector is used as information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 subtracts the offset value from the horizontal component of the block vector. The resulting value is encoded. When the encoding apparatus 100 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector is not used as information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, the encoding apparatus 100 does not consider the offset value and blocks Encode the horizontal component of the vector. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 encodes the horizontal component of the block vector without subtracting the offset value from the horizontal component of the block vector. Here, the offset value may be the horizontal size of the current block 12. The offset value may be a predetermined value.
 図14は、実施の形態におけるインター予測部により符号化されたビットストリームを復号する復号装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of a decoding device that decodes a bitstream encoded by the inter prediction unit according to the embodiment.
 まず、復号装置200は、現ブロック12がIBCモードで符号化されたものであるか否かを判断する(ステップS2000)。 First, the decoding apparatus 200 determines whether or not the current block 12 is encoded in the IBC mode (step S2000).
 復号装置200が、現ブロック12がIBCモードで符号化されたものでないと判断した場合(ステップS2000でNo)、復号装置200は動作を終了する。 When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the current block 12 is not encoded in the IBC mode (No in step S2000), the decoding apparatus 200 ends the operation.
 復号装置200が、現ブロック12がIBCモードで符号化されたものであると判断した場合(ステップS2000でYes)、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分を示す情報を復号する(ステップS2001)。ここで、第1の方向とは、水平方向であってもよいし、垂直方向であってもよい。ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分を示す情報とは、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分であってもよいし、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分を加工して得られた値でもよい。 When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the current block 12 is encoded in the IBC mode (Yes in step S2000), the decoding apparatus 200 decodes information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector. (Step S2001). Here, the first direction may be a horizontal direction or a vertical direction. The information indicating the component in the first direction of the block vector may be a component in the first direction of the block vector, or may be a value obtained by processing the component in the first direction of the block vector. .
 次に、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分の値が所定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する(ステップS2002)。ここで、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズ以下であることであってもよい。なお、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの水平成分BVxが、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズより小さいことであってもよい。また、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズ以下であることであってもよい。なお、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分BVyが、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズより小さいことであってもよい。また、所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことでもよい。これにより、復号装置200は、現ブロック12と異なるブロックの一部が、参照可能領域の下限よりも、下に存在するときに、当該ブロックを参照することを避けることができる。つまり、IBCにおいて、参照ブロックが、参照可能領域より下に存在する場合を排除することができる。 Next, the decoding apparatus 200 determines whether or not the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector satisfies a predetermined condition (step S2002). Here, the predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12. The predetermined condition may be that the horizontal component BVx of the block vector is smaller than the horizontal size of the current block 12. The predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is equal to or smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction. The predetermined condition may be that the vertical component BVy of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction. Further, the predetermined condition may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value. Thereby, the decoding apparatus 200 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block 12 exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area. That is, it is possible to eliminate the case where the reference block exists below the referenceable area in the IBC.
 復号装置200が、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分の値が所定の条件を満たすと判断した場合(ステップS2002でYes)、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、オフセット値を加算する。そして、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報を復号した値に対してオフセット値を加算した値を、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報として復号する(ステップS2003)。つまり、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報を復号した値に対してオフセット値を加算することで、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報を復号する。ここで、第2の方向とは、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち、第1の方向と異なる方向である。また、オフセット値は、第2の方向における現ブロック12のサイズを示す値でもよい。また、オフセット値は、予め定められた所定の値でもよい。 When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector satisfies the predetermined condition (Yes in step S2002), the decoding apparatus 200 indicates information indicating the component of the block vector in the second direction. The offset value is added to the decoded value. Then, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes a value obtained by adding the offset value to a value obtained by decoding the information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector as information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector ( Step S2003). That is, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector by adding the offset value to a value obtained by decoding the information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector. Here, the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The offset value may be a value indicating the size of the current block 12 in the second direction. The offset value may be a predetermined value.
 復号装置200が、ブロックベクトルの第1の方向の成分の値が所定の条件を満たさないと判断した場合(ステップS2002でNo)、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報を復号する(ステップS2004)。ここで、第2の方向とは、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち、第1の方向と異なる方向である。また、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分を示す情報は、ブロックベクトルの第2の方向の成分でもよい。 When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value of the component in the first direction of the block vector does not satisfy the predetermined condition (No in step S2002), the decoding apparatus 200 indicates the component of the block vector in the second direction. The information is decrypted (step S2004). Here, the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The information indicating the component in the second direction of the block vector may be a component in the second direction of the block vector.
 ここで、復号装置200は動作を終了する。 Here, the decoding device 200 ends the operation.
 なお、図12Aで示されたケース1の条件に当てはまる場合は、第1の方向は、ブロックベクトルの水平方向とされる。また、図12Bで示されたケース2の条件に当てはまる場合は、第1の方向は、ブロックベクトルの垂直方向とされる。 In addition, when the condition of case 1 shown in FIG. 12A is applied, the first direction is the horizontal direction of the block vector. Further, when the condition of case 2 shown in FIG. 12B is satisfied, the first direction is the vertical direction of the block vector.
 例えば、復号装置200は、第1の方向がブロックベクトルの水平方向である場合、ブロックベクトルの水平成分の値に応じて、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分にオフセット値を加算した値をブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報として復号するか否かを判断する。復号装置200がブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの垂直成分として復号すると判断した場合、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分にオフセット値を加算して、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を復号する。復号装置200が、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの垂直成分を示す情報として復号しないと判断した場合、復号装置200は、オフセット値を考慮せずに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を復号する。つまり、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分にオフセット値を加算せずに、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分を復号する。ここで、オフセット値は、現ブロック12の垂直方向のサイズでもよい。また、オフセット値は、予め定められた所定の値でもよい。 For example, when the first direction is the horizontal direction of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 uses a value obtained by adding an offset value to the vertical component of the block vector according to the horizontal component value of the block vector. It is determined whether or not the information is to be decoded. When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is decoded as the vertical component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 adds the offset value to the vertical component of the block vector, Decodes the vertical component of the block vector. When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector is not decoded as the information indicating the vertical component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 does not consider the offset value, Decodes the vertical component of the block vector. That is, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes the vertical component of the block vector without adding the offset value to the vertical component of the block vector. Here, the offset value may be the size of the current block 12 in the vertical direction. The offset value may be a predetermined value.
 また、例えば、復号装置200は、第1の方向がブロックベクトルの垂直方向である場合、ブロックベクトルの垂直成分の値に応じて、ブロックベクトルの水平成分にオフセット値を加算した値をブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報として復号するか否かを判断する。復号装置200がブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの水平成分として復号すると判断した場合、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分にオフセット値を加算して、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を復号する。復号装置200が、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報にオフセット値を適用した値をブロックベクトルの水平成分を示す情報として復号しないと判断した場合、復号装置200は、オフセット値を考慮せずに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を復号する。つまり、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの水平成分にオフセット値を加算せずに、ブロックベクトルの水平成分を復号する。ここで、オフセット値は、現ブロック12の水平方向のサイズでもよい。また、オフセット値は、予め定められた所定の値でもよい。 Also, for example, when the first direction is the vertical direction of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 uses a value obtained by adding an offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector according to the value of the vertical component of the block vector. It is determined whether to decode the information indicating the horizontal component. When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector is decoded as the horizontal component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 adds the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector, Decode the horizontal component of the block vector. When the decoding apparatus 200 determines that the value obtained by applying the offset value to the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector is not decoded as the information indicating the horizontal component of the block vector, the decoding apparatus 200 does not consider the offset value, Decode the horizontal component of the block vector. That is, the decoding apparatus 200 decodes the horizontal component of the block vector without adding the offset value to the horizontal component of the block vector. Here, the offset value may be the horizontal size of the current block 12. The offset value may be a predetermined value.
 図15は、実施の形態におけるループフィルタ考慮制限を表す図である。符号化装置100が、現ブロック12に、ブロック単位でデブロッキングフィルタ等のループフィルタを適用する場合には、ループフィルタ考慮制限を行う。ループフィルタ考慮制限とは、ループフィルタ処理で使用する現ブロック12の周辺画素を、参照可能領域20から除外することである。これにより、IBCモードでの符号化において、ループフィルタ適用後の画素値が参照画素として用いられることが保証される。ここで、ループフィルタは、ループ内フィルタとも呼ばれる。 FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the loop filter consideration restriction in the embodiment. When the encoding apparatus 100 applies a loop filter such as a deblocking filter to the current block 12 in units of blocks, it performs a loop filter consideration restriction. The loop filter consideration restriction is to exclude peripheral pixels of the current block 12 used in the loop filter processing from the referenceable area 20. This ensures that the pixel value after applying the loop filter is used as a reference pixel in encoding in the IBC mode. Here, the loop filter is also called an in-loop filter.
 例えば、カレントピクチャに、ループフィルタを垂直方向に適用してから水平方向に適用する場合、参照可能領域20の下側の画素がループフィルタ未適用の領域となる。よって、参照可能領域20の下側の画素を参照不可とする。また、例えば、カレントピクチャに、ループフィルタを水平方向に適用してから垂直方向に適用する場合、参照可能領域20の右側の画素の領域のうち、現ブロック12の垂直方向の辺と隣接する領域が、ループフィルタ未適用の領域となる。よって、参照可能領域20の右側の画素の領域のうち、現ブロック12の垂直方向の辺と隣接する領域の画素を参照不可とする。参照可能領域から除外される領域40は、例えば、図15に図示された領域である。 For example, when the loop filter is applied to the current picture in the vertical direction and then applied in the horizontal direction, the lower pixel of the referenceable area 20 is an area to which the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, it is impossible to refer to the pixels below the referable region 20. Further, for example, when the loop filter is applied to the current picture in the horizontal direction and then applied in the vertical direction, the area adjacent to the vertical side of the current block 12 in the pixel area on the right side of the referenceable area 20 Is a region where the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, in the pixel area on the right side of the referable area 20, the pixels in the area adjacent to the side in the vertical direction of the current block 12 cannot be referred to. The region 40 excluded from the referenceable region is, for example, the region illustrated in FIG.
 上記に記載の処理は、復号装置200においても同様である。復号装置200が、現ブロック12に、ブロック単位でデブロッキングフィルタ等のループフィルタを適用する場合には、ループフィルタ考慮制限を行う。ループフィルタ考慮制限とは、ループフィルタ処理で使用する現ブロック12の周辺画素を、参照可能領域から除外することである。これにより、IBCモードでの復号において、ループフィルタ適用後の画素値が参照画素として用いられることが保証される。ここで、ループフィルタは、ループ内フィルタとも呼ばれる。 The processing described above is the same in the decoding device 200. When the decoding apparatus 200 applies a loop filter such as a deblocking filter to the current block 12 in units of blocks, it performs a loop filter consideration restriction. The loop filter consideration restriction is to exclude peripheral pixels of the current block 12 used in the loop filter processing from the referenceable area. This ensures that the pixel value after application of the loop filter is used as the reference pixel in decoding in the IBC mode. Here, the loop filter is also called an in-loop filter.
 例えば、カレントピクチャにループフィルタを垂直方向に適用してから水平方向に適用する場合、参照可能領域の下側の画素がループフィルタ未適用の領域となる。よって、参照可能領域の下側の画素を参照不可とする。また、例えば、カレントピクチャにループフィルタを水平方向に適用してから垂直方向に適用する場合、参照可能領域の右側の画素がループフィルタ未適用の領域となる。よって、参照可能領域の右側の画素を参照不可とする。参照可能領域から除外される領域40は、例えば、図15に図示された領域である。 For example, when the loop filter is applied to the current picture in the vertical direction and then applied in the horizontal direction, the lower pixel of the referenceable area becomes an area to which the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, it is impossible to refer to the pixel below the referable area. Further, for example, when the loop filter is applied to the current picture in the horizontal direction and then applied in the vertical direction, the pixel on the right side of the referenceable area is an area to which the loop filter is not applied. Therefore, the pixel on the right side of the referenceable area is not referred to. The region 40 excluded from the referenceable region is, for example, the region illustrated in FIG.
 なお、符号化装置100及び復号装置200において、IBCモードにおいてループフィルタの適用を有効にするか否かに関する情報は、SPS等のヘッダ情報から復号された情報に基づいて決定されてもよい。 Note that in the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200, information regarding whether or not to enable application of the loop filter in the IBC mode may be determined based on information decoded from header information such as SPS.
 また、符号化装置100及び復号装置200において、ループフィルタの適用が有効である場合、ループフィルタ考慮制限を有効としてもよい。反対に、ループフィルタの適用が無効である場合、ループフィルタ考慮制限を無効としてもよい。 Further, in the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200, when the application of the loop filter is effective, the loop filter consideration restriction may be enabled. On the other hand, when the application of the loop filter is invalid, the loop filter consideration restriction may be invalidated.
 なお、符号化装置100及び復号装置200において、ループフィルタ処理で使用する現ブロック12の周辺画素を、ループフィルタ考慮制限により参照可能領域から除外するか否かを、水平方向及び垂直方向のそれぞれで切り替えて決定してもよい。例えば、現ブロック12の周辺画素のうち、水平方向の画素に関しては、ループフィルタ考慮制限を有効とし、現ブロック12の周辺画素のうち、垂直方向の画素に関しては、ループフィルタ考慮制限を無効としてもよい。 Note that in the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200, whether or not the peripheral pixels of the current block 12 used in the loop filter processing are excluded from the referenceable region due to the loop filter consideration restriction in each of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. It may be determined by switching. For example, the loop filter consideration restriction is valid for the pixels in the horizontal direction among the peripheral pixels of the current block 12, and the loop filter consideration restriction is invalid for the pixels in the vertical direction among the peripheral pixels of the current block 12. Good.
 逆に、例えば、符号化装置100及び復号装置200において、現ブロック12の周辺画素のうち、水平方向の画素に関しては、ループフィルタ考慮制限を無効とし、現ブロック12の周辺画素のうち、垂直方向の画素に関しては、ループフィルタ考慮制限を有効としてもよい。 On the other hand, for example, in the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200, regarding the pixels in the horizontal direction among the peripheral pixels of the current block 12, the loop filter consideration restriction is invalidated, and among the peripheral pixels of the current block 12, the vertical direction For these pixels, the loop filter consideration restriction may be effective.
 なお、図11Aから図15にかけて、符号化装置100及び復号装置200のインター予測部がIBCを行う場合を説明したが、これに限らない。符号化装置100及び復号装置200のイントラ予測部において、IBCが実施されてもよい。 In addition, although the case where the inter prediction part of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 performs IBC was demonstrated from FIG. 11A to FIG. 15, it is not restricted to this. In the intra prediction units of the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200, IBC may be performed.
 また、図12Aから図14で説明されたオフセット値は、上記で説明されたものに限らない。BVyを符号化する際のオフセット値をHcとし、BVxを符号化する際のオフセット値をWcとしたが、これに限らず、他の値を用いてもよい。例えば、図15における参照可能領域から除外される領域40の高さAをHcに加算した値、または、図15における参照可能領域から除外される領域40の幅BをWcに加算した値を、オフセット値として用いてもよい。 Also, the offset values described in FIGS. 12A to 14 are not limited to those described above. Although the offset value for encoding BVy is Hc and the offset value for encoding BVx is Wc, the present invention is not limited to this, and other values may be used. For example, a value obtained by adding the height A of the region 40 excluded from the referenceable region in FIG. 15 to Hc, or a value obtained by adding the width B of the region 40 excluded from the referenceable region in FIG. It may be used as an offset value.
 [実装]
 図16は、実施の形態における符号化装置の実装例を示すブロック図である。符号化装置100は、回路150及びメモリ152を備える。例えば、図1に示された符号化装置100の複数の構成要素は、図16に示された回路150及びメモリ152によって実装される。
[Implementation]
FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the encoding device according to the embodiment. The encoding device 100 includes a circuit 150 and a memory 152. For example, a plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 are implemented by the circuit 150 and the memory 152 illustrated in FIG.
 回路150は、メモリ152にアクセス可能な電子回路であって、情報処理を行う。例えば、回路150は、メモリ152を用いて動画像を符号化する専用又は汎用の電子回路である。回路150は、CPUのようなプロセッサであってもよい。また、回路150は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。 The circuit 150 is an electronic circuit that can access the memory 152 and performs information processing. For example, the circuit 150 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that encodes a moving image using the memory 152. The circuit 150 may be a processor such as a CPU. The circuit 150 may be an aggregate of a plurality of electronic circuits.
 また、例えば、回路150は、図1に示された符号化装置100の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素を除く、複数の構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。すなわち、回路150は、これらの構成要素の動作として上述された動作を行ってもよい。 Further, for example, the circuit 150 may serve as a plurality of constituent elements excluding a constituent element for storing information among a plurality of constituent elements of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. That is, the circuit 150 may perform the operation described above as the operation of these components.
 メモリ152は、回路150が動画像を符号化するための情報が記憶される専用又は汎用のメモリである。メモリ152は、電子回路であってもよく、回路150に接続されていてもよいし、回路150に含まれていてもよい。 The memory 152 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 150 to encode a moving image is stored. The memory 152 may be an electronic circuit, may be connected to the circuit 150, or may be included in the circuit 150.
 また、メモリ152は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよいし、複数のサブメモリで構成されていてもよい。また、メモリ152は、磁気ディスク又は光ディスク等であってもよいし、ストレージ又は記録媒体等と表現されてもよい。また、メモリ152は、不揮発性メモリでもよいし、揮発性メモリでもよい。 Further, the memory 152 may be an aggregate of a plurality of electronic circuits or may be configured by a plurality of sub memories. Further, the memory 152 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 152 may be a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
 例えば、メモリ152は、図1に示された符号化装置100の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。 For example, the memory 152 may serve as a component for storing information among a plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG.
 また、メモリ152には、符号化される動画像が記憶されてもよいし、符号化された動画像に対応するビット列が記憶されてもよい。また、メモリ152には、回路150が動画像を符号化するためのプログラムが記憶されていてもよい。 The memory 152 may store a moving image to be encoded, or may store a bit string corresponding to the encoded moving image. The memory 152 may store a program for the circuit 150 to encode a moving image.
 なお、符号化装置100において、図1に示された複数の構成要素の全てが実装されなくてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の全てが行われなくてもよい。図1に示された複数の構成要素の一部は、他の装置に含まれていてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の一部は、他の装置によって実行されてもよい。そして、符号化装置100において、図1に示された複数の構成要素のうちの一部が実装され、上述された複数の処理の一部が行われることによって、動画像の符号化に関連する情報が適切に設定され得る。 Note that in the encoding device 100, not all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 may be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be executed by another device. Then, in the encoding device 100, a part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 is mounted, and a part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, so that it relates to the encoding of the moving image. Information can be set appropriately.
 図17は、実施の形態における符号化装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。例えば、図16に示された符号化装置100は、インター予測部でIBCを用いた符号化を行う際に、図17に示された動作を行う。具体的には、回路150は、メモリ152を用いて、以下の動作を行う。 FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an operation example of the encoding apparatus according to the embodiment. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 illustrated in FIG. 16 performs the operation illustrated in FIG. 17 when performing the encoding using IBC in the inter prediction unit. Specifically, the circuit 150 performs the following operation using the memory 152.
 ブロックベクトルが所定の条件を満たすときに、符号化装置100は、ブロックベクトルの第1成分から現ブロック12の第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、ブロックベクトルを符号化する(ステップS3000)。ここで、第1方向は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちのひとつの方向とする。また、ブロックベクトルの第1成分は、ブロックベクトルの第1方向における成分とする。 When the block vector satisfies a predetermined condition, the encoding apparatus 100 encodes the block vector using a value obtained by subtracting the size of the current block 12 in the first direction from the first component of the block vector (step S3000). ). Here, the first direction is one of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The first component of the block vector is a component in the first direction of the block vector.
 ここで、符号化装置100は、動作を終了する。 Here, the encoding device 100 ends the operation.
 また、ステップS3000における所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの第2成分が現ブロック12の第2方向におけるサイズよりも小さいことであってもよい。 Further, the predetermined condition in step S3000 may be that the second component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the second direction.
 また、ステップS3000における所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことでもよい。これにより、符号化装置100は、現ブロックと異なるブロックの一部が、参照可能領域20の下限よりも、下に存在するときに、当該ブロックを参照することを避けることができる。つまり、IBCにおいて、参照ブロック30が、参照可能領域20より下に存在する場合を排除することができる。 Further, the predetermined condition in step S3000 may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value. Thereby, the encoding apparatus 100 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area 20. That is, the case where the reference block 30 exists below the referenceable area 20 in the IBC can be excluded.
 上記において、第2方向とは、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向と異なる方向である。また、ブロックベクトルの第2成分は、ブロックベクトルの第2方向における成分とする。 In the above, the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The second component of the block vector is a component in the second direction of the block vector.
 図18は、実施の形態における復号装置の実装例を示すブロック図である。復号装置200は、回路250及びメモリ252を備える。例えば、図10に示された復号装置200の複数の構成要素は、図18に示された回路250及びメモリ252によって実装される。 FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating an implementation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment. The decoding device 200 includes a circuit 250 and a memory 252. For example, a plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 are implemented by the circuit 250 and the memory 252 illustrated in FIG.
 回路250は、メモリ252にアクセス可能な電子回路であって、情報処理を行う。例えば、回路250は、メモリ252を用いて動画像を復号する専用又は汎用の電子回路である。回路250は、CPUのようなプロセッサであってもよい。また、回路250は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。 The circuit 250 is an electronic circuit that can access the memory 252 and performs information processing. For example, the circuit 250 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that decodes a moving image using the memory 252. The circuit 250 may be a processor such as a CPU. The circuit 250 may be an assembly of a plurality of electronic circuits.
 また、例えば、回路250は、図10に示された復号装置200の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素を除く、複数の構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。すなわち、回路250は、これらの構成要素の動作として上述された動作を行ってもよい。 Further, for example, the circuit 250 may serve as a plurality of constituent elements excluding a constituent element for storing information among a plurality of constituent elements of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. That is, the circuit 250 may perform the operation described above as the operation of these components.
 メモリ252は、回路250が動画像を復号するための情報が記憶される専用又は汎用のメモリである。メモリ252は、電子回路であってもよく、回路250に接続されていてもよいし、回路250に含まれていてもよい。 The memory 252 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 250 to decode a moving image is stored. The memory 252 may be an electronic circuit, may be connected to the circuit 250, or may be included in the circuit 250.
 また、メモリ252は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよいし、複数のサブメモリで構成されていてもよい。また、メモリ252は、磁気ディスク又は光ディスク等であってもよいし、ストレージ又は記録媒体等と表現されてもよい。また、メモリ252は、不揮発性メモリでもよいし、揮発性メモリでもよい。 Further, the memory 252 may be an aggregate of a plurality of electronic circuits or may be configured by a plurality of sub memories. Further, the memory 252 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 252 may be a nonvolatile memory or a volatile memory.
 例えば、メモリ252は、図10に示された復号装置200の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。 For example, the memory 252 may serve as a component for storing information among a plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG.
 また、メモリ252には、復号された動画像に対応するビット列が記憶されてもよいし、復号された動画像が記憶されてもよい。また、メモリ252には、回路250が動画像を復号するためのプログラムが記憶されていてもよい。 Further, the memory 252 may store a bit string corresponding to the decoded moving image, or may store the decoded moving image. The memory 252 may store a program for the circuit 250 to decode a moving image.
 なお、復号装置200において、図10に示された複数の構成要素の全てが実装されなくてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の全てが行われなくてもよい。図10に示された複数の構成要素の一部は、他の装置に含まれていてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の一部は、他の装置によって実行されてもよい。そして、復号装置200において、図10に示された複数の構成要素のうちの一部が実装され、上述された複数の処理の一部が行われることによって、動画像の復号に関連する情報が適切に設定され得る。 Note that in the decoding device 200, all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 may not be implemented, and all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components illustrated in FIG. 10 may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the decoding device 200, a part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 is implemented, and a part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, so that information related to the decoding of the moving image is obtained. It can be set appropriately.
 図19は、実施の形態における復号装置の動作例を示すフローチャートである。例えば、図18に示された復号装置200は、インター予測部でIBCを用いた復号を行う際に、図19に示された動作を行う。具体的には、回路250は、メモリ252を用いて、以下の動作を行う。 FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the decoding device according to the embodiment. For example, the decoding apparatus 200 illustrated in FIG. 18 performs the operation illustrated in FIG. 19 when performing decoding using IBC in the inter prediction unit. Specifically, the circuit 250 performs the following operation using the memory 252.
 ブロックベクトルが所定の条件を満たすときに、復号装置200は、ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、現ブロック12の第1方向のサイズを加算した値を用いて、ブロックベクトルを復号する(ステップS4000)。ここで、第1方向は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちのひとつの方向とする。また、ブロックベクトルの第1成分は、ブロックベクトルの第1方向における成分とする。 When the block vector satisfies a predetermined condition, the decoding apparatus 200 uses a value obtained by adding the size in the first direction of the current block 12 to a value obtained by decoding information indicating the first component of the block vector. The block vector is decoded (step S4000). Here, the first direction is one of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The first component of the block vector is a component in the first direction of the block vector.
 ここで、復号装置200は、動作を終了する。 Here, the decoding apparatus 200 ends the operation.
 また、ステップS4000における所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの第2成分が現ブロック12の第2方向におけるサイズよりも小さいことであってもよい。 Further, the predetermined condition in step S4000 may be that the second component of the block vector is smaller than the size of the current block 12 in the second direction.
 また、ステップS4000における所定の条件とは、ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことでもよい。これにより、復号装置200は、現ブロック12と異なるブロックの一部が、参照可能領域の下限よりも、下に存在するときに、当該ブロックを参照することを避けることができる。つまり、IBCにおいて、参照ブロックが、参照可能領域より下に存在する場合を排除することができる。 Further, the predetermined condition in step S4000 may be that the second component of the block vector is not a negative value. Thereby, the decoding apparatus 200 can avoid referring to the block when a part of the block different from the current block 12 exists below the lower limit of the referenceable area. That is, it is possible to eliminate the case where the reference block exists below the referenceable area in the IBC.
 上記において、第2方向とは、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向と異なる方向であるとする。また、ブロックベクトルの第2成分は、ブロックベクトルの第2方向における成分とする。 In the above, it is assumed that the second direction is a direction different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The second component of the block vector is a component in the second direction of the block vector.
 [補足]
 本実施の形態における符号化装置100及び復号装置200は、それぞれ、画像符号化装置及び画像復号装置として利用されてもよいし、動画像符号化装置及び動画像復号装置として利用されてもよい。
[Supplement]
The encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 in the present embodiment may be used as an image encoding device and an image decoding device, respectively, or may be used as a moving image encoding device and a moving image decoding device, respectively.
 また、本実施の形態において、各構成要素は、専用のハードウェアで構成されるか、各構成要素に適したソフトウェアプログラムを実行することによって実現されてもよい。各構成要素は、CPU又はプロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ハードディスク又は半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェアプログラムを読み出して実行することによって実現されてもよい。 Further, in the present embodiment, each component may be configured by dedicated hardware or may be realized by executing a software program suitable for each component. Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
 具体的には、符号化装置100及び復号装置200のそれぞれは、処理回路(Processing Circuitry)と、当該処理回路に電気的に接続された、当該処理回路からアクセス可能な記憶装置(Storage)とを備えていてもよい。例えば、処理回路は回路150又は250に対応し、記憶装置はメモリ152又は252に対応する。 Specifically, each of the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 includes a processing circuit (Processing Circuit) and a storage device (Storage) electrically connected to the processing circuit and accessible from the processing circuit. You may have. For example, the processing circuit corresponds to the circuit 150 or 250, and the storage device corresponds to the memory 152 or 252.
 処理回路は、専用のハードウェア及びプログラム実行部の少なくとも一方を含み、記憶装置を用いて処理を実行する。また、記憶装置は、処理回路がプログラム実行部を含む場合には、当該プログラム実行部により実行されるソフトウェアプログラムを記憶する。 The processing circuit includes at least one of dedicated hardware and a program execution unit, and executes processing using a storage device. Further, when the processing circuit includes a program execution unit, the storage device stores a software program executed by the program execution unit.
 ここで、本実施の形態の符号化装置100又は復号装置200などを実現するソフトウェアは、次のようなプログラムである。 Here, the software that realizes the encoding apparatus 100 or the decoding apparatus 200 of the present embodiment is the following program.
 すなわち、このプログラムは、コンピュータに、画面内の符号化済みの画素から構成される予測ブロックと符号化対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを符号化し、前記ブロックベクトルの符号化において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報として、前記ブロックベクトルの前記第1成分から前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、前記ブロックベクトルを符号化する、符号化方法を実行させてもよい。 That is, this program encodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position between a prediction block composed of encoded pixels in a screen and an encoding target block on a computer. As the information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction when the above condition is satisfied, from the first component of the block vector to the first of the block to be encoded An encoding method for encoding the block vector using a value obtained by subtracting the size of the direction may be executed.
 あるいは、このプログラムは、コンピュータに、画面内の復号済みブロックの画素から構成される予測ブロックと復号対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを復号し、前記ブロックベクトルの復号において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを加算して前記ブロックベクトルを復号する、復号方法を実行させてもよい。 Alternatively, the program decodes a block vector indicating a displacement of a position of a prediction block and a decoding target block configured by pixels of a decoded block in the screen, and a predetermined condition in decoding the block vector. When the condition is satisfied, the size of the decoding target block in the first direction is added to the value obtained by decoding the information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. A decoding method for decoding the block vector may be executed.
 また、各構成要素は、上述の通り、回路であってもよい。これらの回路は、全体として1つの回路を構成してもよいし、それぞれ別々の回路であってもよい。また、各構成要素は、汎用的なプロセッサで実現されてもよいし、専用のプロセッサで実現されてもよい。 Further, each component may be a circuit as described above. These circuits may constitute one circuit as a whole, or may be separate circuits. Each component may be realized by a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor.
 また、特定の構成要素が実行する処理を別の構成要素が実行してもよい。また、処理を実行する順番が変更されてもよいし、複数の処理が並行して実行されてもよい。また、符号化復号装置が、符号化装置100及び復号装置200を備えていてもよい。 Also, another component may execute the process executed by a specific component. In addition, the order in which the processes are executed may be changed, or a plurality of processes may be executed in parallel. Further, the encoding / decoding device may include the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200.
 また、説明に用いられた第1及び第2等の序数は、適宜、付け替えられてもよい。また、構成要素などに対して、序数が新たに与えられてもよいし、取り除かれてもよい。 In addition, the ordinal numbers such as the first and second used in the description may be appropriately replaced. In addition, an ordinal number may be newly given to a component or the like, or may be removed.
 以上、符号化装置100及び復号装置200の態様について、実施の形態に基づいて説明したが、符号化装置100及び復号装置200の態様は、この実施の形態に限定されるものではない。本開示の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、当業者が思いつく各種変形を本実施の形態に施したものや、異なる実施の形態における構成要素を組み合わせて構築される形態も、符号化装置100及び復号装置200の態様の範囲内に含まれてもよい。 As mentioned above, although the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 was demonstrated based on embodiment, the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 is not limited to this embodiment. As long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present disclosure, the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 may be configured in which various modifications conceived by those skilled in the art have been made in the present embodiment, or in a form constructed by combining components in different embodiments. It may be included within the scope of the embodiment.
 本態様を本開示における他の態様の少なくとも一部と組み合わせて実施してもよい。また、本態様のフローチャートに記載の一部の処理、装置の一部の構成、シンタックスの一部などを他の態様と組み合わせて実施してもよい。 This aspect may be implemented in combination with at least a part of other aspects in the present disclosure. In addition, a part of the processing, a part of the configuration of the apparatus, a part of the syntax, and the like described in the flowchart of this aspect may be implemented in combination with another aspect.
 (実施の形態2)
 以上の各実施の形態において、機能ブロックの各々は、通常、MPU及びメモリ等によって実現可能である。また、機能ブロックの各々による処理は、通常、プロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ROM等の記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェア(プログラム)を読み出して実行することで実現される。当該ソフトウェアはダウンロード等により配布されてもよいし、半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録して配布されてもよい。なお、各機能ブロックをハードウェア(専用回路)によって実現することも、当然、可能である。
(Embodiment 2)
In each of the above embodiments, each of the functional blocks can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, and the like. Further, the processing by each functional block is usually realized by a program execution unit such as a processor reading and executing software (program) recorded on a recording medium such as a ROM. The software may be distributed by downloading or the like, or may be distributed by being recorded on a recording medium such as a semiconductor memory. Naturally, each functional block can be realized by hardware (dedicated circuit).
 また、各実施の形態において説明した処理は、単一の装置(システム)を用いて集中処理することによって実現してもよく、又は、複数の装置を用いて分散処理することによって実現してもよい。また、上記プログラムを実行するプロセッサは、単数であってもよく、複数であってもよい。すなわち、集中処理を行ってもよく、又は分散処理を行ってもよい。 Further, the processing described in each embodiment may be realized by centralized processing using a single device (system), or may be realized by distributed processing using a plurality of devices. Good. The number of processors that execute the program may be one or more. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
 本開示の態様は、以上の実施例に限定されることなく、種々の変更が可能であり、それらも本開示の態様の範囲内に包含される。 The aspects of the present disclosure are not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications are possible, and these are also included within the scope of the aspects of the present disclosure.
 さらにここで、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法(画像符号化方法)又は動画像復号化方法(画像復号方法)の応用例とそれを用いたシステムを説明する。当該システムは、画像符号化方法を用いた画像符号化装置、画像復号方法を用いた画像復号装置、及び両方を備える画像符号化復号装置を有することを特徴とする。システムにおける他の構成について、場合に応じて適切に変更することができる。 Furthermore, application examples of the moving picture coding method (picture coding method) or the moving picture decoding method (picture decoding method) shown in the above embodiments and a system using the same will be described. The system includes an image encoding device using an image encoding method, an image decoding device using an image decoding method, and an image encoding / decoding device including both. Other configurations in the system can be appropriately changed according to circumstances.
 [使用例]
 図20は、コンテンツ配信サービスを実現するコンテンツ供給システムex100の全体構成を示す図である。通信サービスの提供エリアを所望の大きさに分割し、各セル内にそれぞれ固定無線局である基地局ex106、ex107、ex108、ex109、ex110が設置されている。
[Example of use]
FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an overall configuration of a content supply system ex100 that implements a content distribution service. The communication service providing area is divided into desired sizes, and base stations ex106, ex107, ex108, ex109, and ex110, which are fixed wireless stations, are installed in each cell.
 このコンテンツ供給システムex100では、インターネットex101に、インターネットサービスプロバイダex102又は通信網ex104、及び基地局ex106~ex110を介して、コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、及びスマートフォンex115などの各機器が接続される。当該コンテンツ供給システムex100は、上記のいずれかの要素を組合せて接続するようにしてもよい。固定無線局である基地局ex106~ex110を介さずに、各機器が電話網又は近距離無線等を介して直接的又は間接的に相互に接続されていてもよい。また、ストリーミングサーバex103は、インターネットex101等を介して、コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、及びスマートフォンex115などの各機器と接続される。また、ストリーミングサーバex103は、衛星ex116を介して、飛行機ex117内のホットスポット内の端末等と接続される。 In this content supply system ex100, devices such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101, the Internet service provider ex102 or the communication network ex104, and the base stations ex106 to ex110. Is connected. The content supply system ex100 may be connected by combining any of the above elements. Each device may be directly or indirectly connected to each other via a telephone network or a short-range wireless communication without using the base stations ex106 to ex110 which are fixed wireless stations. The streaming server ex103 is connected to each device such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101. The streaming server ex103 is connected to a terminal in a hot spot in the airplane ex117 via the satellite ex116.
 なお、基地局ex106~ex110の代わりに、無線アクセスポイント又はホットスポット等が用いられてもよい。また、ストリーミングサーバex103は、インターネットex101又はインターネットサービスプロバイダex102を介さずに直接通信網ex104と接続されてもよいし、衛星ex116を介さず直接飛行機ex117と接続されてもよい。 Note that a wireless access point or a hot spot may be used instead of the base stations ex106 to ex110. Further, the streaming server ex103 may be directly connected to the communication network ex104 without going through the Internet ex101 or the Internet service provider ex102, or may be directly connected to the airplane ex117 without going through the satellite ex116.
 カメラex113はデジタルカメラ等の静止画撮影、及び動画撮影が可能な機器である。また、スマートフォンex115は、一般に2G、3G、3.9G、4G、そして今後は5Gと呼ばれる移動通信システムの方式に対応したスマートフォン機、携帯電話機、又はPHS(Personal Handyphone System)等である。 The camera ex113 is a device that can shoot still images and moving images such as a digital camera. The smartphone ex115 is a smartphone, a cellular phone, or a PHS (Personal Handyphone System) that is compatible with a mobile communication system generally called 2G, 3G, 3.9G, 4G, and 5G in the future.
 家電ex118は、冷蔵庫、又は家庭用燃料電池コージェネレーションシステムに含まれる機器等である。 The home appliance ex118 is a device included in a refrigerator or a household fuel cell cogeneration system.
 コンテンツ供給システムex100では、撮影機能を有する端末が基地局ex106等を通じてストリーミングサーバex103に接続されることで、ライブ配信等が可能になる。ライブ配信では、端末(コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、スマートフォンex115、及び飛行機ex117内の端末等)は、ユーザが当該端末を用いて撮影した静止画又は動画コンテンツに対して上記各実施の形態で説明した符号化処理を行い、符号化により得られた映像データと、映像に対応する音を符号化した音データと多重化し、得られたデータをストリーミングサーバex103に送信する。即ち、各端末は、本開示の一態様に係る画像符号化装置として機能する。 In the content supply system ex100, a terminal having a photographing function is connected to the streaming server ex103 through the base station ex106 or the like, thereby enabling live distribution or the like. In live distribution, the terminal (computer ex111, game machine ex112, camera ex113, home appliance ex114, smartphone ex115, terminal in airplane ex117, etc.) is used for the still image or video content captured by the user using the terminal. The encoding process described in each embodiment is performed, and the video data obtained by the encoding and the sound data obtained by encoding the sound corresponding to the video are multiplexed, and the obtained data is transmitted to the streaming server ex103. That is, each terminal functions as an image encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
 一方、ストリーミングサーバex103は要求のあったクライアントに対して送信されたコンテンツデータをストリーム配信する。クライアントは、上記符号化処理されたデータを復号化することが可能な、コンピュータex111、ゲーム機ex112、カメラex113、家電ex114、スマートフォンex115、又は飛行機ex117内の端末等である。配信されたデータを受信した各機器は、受信したデータを復号化処理して再生する。即ち、各機器は、本開示の一態様に係る画像復号装置として機能する。 On the other hand, the streaming server ex103 streams the content data transmitted to the requested client. The client is a computer or the like in the computer ex111, the game machine ex112, the camera ex113, the home appliance ex114, the smart phone ex115, or the airplane ex117 that can decode the encoded data. Each device that has received the distributed data decrypts and reproduces the received data. That is, each device functions as an image decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
 [分散処理]
 また、ストリーミングサーバex103は複数のサーバ又は複数のコンピュータであって、データを分散して処理したり記録したり配信するものであってもよい。例えば、ストリーミングサーバex103は、CDN(Contents Delivery Network)により実現され、世界中に分散された多数のエッジサーバとエッジサーバ間をつなぐネットワークによりコンテンツ配信が実現されていてもよい。CDNでは、クライアントに応じて物理的に近いエッジサーバが動的に割り当てられる。そして、当該エッジサーバにコンテンツがキャッシュ及び配信されることで遅延を減らすことができる。また、何らかのエラーが発生した場合又はトラフィックの増加などにより通信状態が変わる場合に複数のエッジサーバで処理を分散したり、他のエッジサーバに配信主体を切り替えたり、障害が生じたネットワークの部分を迂回して配信を続けることができるので、高速かつ安定した配信が実現できる。
[Distributed processing]
The streaming server ex103 may be a plurality of servers or a plurality of computers, and may process, record, and distribute data in a distributed manner. For example, the streaming server ex103 may be realized by a CDN (Contents Delivery Network), and content distribution may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers and edge servers distributed all over the world. In CDN, edge servers that are physically close to each other are dynamically allocated according to clients. Then, the content can be cached and distributed to the edge server, thereby reducing the delay. Also, if some error occurs or the communication status changes due to an increase in traffic, etc., the processing is distributed among multiple edge servers, the distribution subject is switched to another edge server, or the part of the network where the failure has occurred Since detouring can be continued, high-speed and stable distribution can be realized.
 また、配信自体の分散処理にとどまらず、撮影したデータの符号化処理を各端末で行ってもよいし、サーバ側で行ってもよいし、互いに分担して行ってもよい。一例として、一般に符号化処理では、処理ループが2度行われる。1度目のループでフレーム又はシーン単位での画像の複雑さ、又は、符号量が検出される。また、2度目のループでは画質を維持して符号化効率を向上させる処理が行われる。例えば、端末が1度目の符号化処理を行い、コンテンツを受け取ったサーバ側が2度目の符号化処理を行うことで、各端末での処理負荷を減らしつつもコンテンツの質と効率を向上させることができる。この場合、ほぼリアルタイムで受信して復号する要求があれば、端末が行った一度目の符号化済みデータを他の端末で受信して再生することもできるので、より柔軟なリアルタイム配信も可能になる。 In addition to the distributed processing of the distribution itself, the captured data may be encoded at each terminal, may be performed on the server side, or may be shared with each other. As an example, in general, in an encoding process, a processing loop is performed twice. In the first loop, the complexity of the image or the code amount in units of frames or scenes is detected. In the second loop, processing for maintaining the image quality and improving the coding efficiency is performed. For example, the terminal performs the first encoding process, and the server receiving the content performs the second encoding process, thereby improving the quality and efficiency of the content while reducing the processing load on each terminal. it can. In this case, if there is a request to receive and decode in almost real time, the encoded data of the first time performed by the terminal can be received and reproduced by another terminal, enabling more flexible real-time distribution. Become.
 他の例として、カメラex113等は、画像から特徴量抽出を行い、特徴量に関するデータをメタデータとして圧縮してサーバに送信する。サーバは、例えば特徴量からオブジェクトの重要性を判断して量子化精度を切り替えるなど、画像の意味に応じた圧縮を行う。特徴量データはサーバでの再度の圧縮時の動きベクトル予測の精度及び効率向上に特に有効である。また、端末でVLC(可変長符号化)などの簡易的な符号化を行い、サーバでCABAC(コンテキスト適応型二値算術符号化方式)など処理負荷の大きな符号化を行ってもよい。 As another example, the camera ex113 or the like extracts a feature amount from an image, compresses data relating to the feature amount as metadata, and transmits the metadata to the server. The server performs compression according to the meaning of the image, for example, by determining the importance of the object from the feature amount and switching the quantization accuracy. The feature data is particularly effective for improving the accuracy and efficiency of motion vector prediction at the time of re-compression on the server. Also, simple coding such as VLC (variable length coding) may be performed at the terminal, and coding with a large processing load such as CABAC (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding) may be performed at the server.
 さらに他の例として、スタジアム、ショッピングモール、又は工場などにおいては、複数の端末によりほぼ同一のシーンが撮影された複数の映像データが存在する場合がある。この場合には、撮影を行った複数の端末と、必要に応じて撮影をしていない他の端末及びサーバを用いて、例えばGOP(Group of Picture)単位、ピクチャ単位、又はピクチャを分割したタイル単位などで符号化処理をそれぞれ割り当てて分散処理を行う。これにより、遅延を減らし、よりリアルタイム性を実現できる。 As yet another example, in a stadium, a shopping mall, a factory, or the like, there may be a plurality of video data in which almost the same scene is captured by a plurality of terminals. In this case, for example, a GOP (Group of Picture) unit, a picture unit, or a tile obtained by dividing a picture using a plurality of terminals that have performed shooting and other terminals and servers that have not performed shooting as necessary. Distributed processing is performed by assigning encoding processing in units or the like. Thereby, delay can be reduced and real-time property can be realized.
 また、複数の映像データはほぼ同一シーンであるため、各端末で撮影された映像データを互いに参照し合えるように、サーバで管理及び/又は指示をしてもよい。または、各端末からの符号化済みデータを、サーバが受信し複数のデータ間で参照関係を変更、又はピクチャ自体を補正或いは差し替えて符号化しなおしてもよい。これにより、一つ一つのデータの質と効率を高めたストリームを生成できる。 In addition, since the plurality of video data are almost the same scene, the server may manage and / or instruct the video data captured by each terminal to refer to each other. Alternatively, the encoded data from each terminal may be received by the server and the reference relationship may be changed among a plurality of data, or the picture itself may be corrected or replaced to be encoded again. This makes it possible to generate a stream with improved quality and efficiency of each piece of data.
 また、サーバは、映像データの符号化方式を変更するトランスコードを行ったうえで映像データを配信してもよい。例えば、サーバは、MPEG系の符号化方式をVP系に変換してもよいし、H.264をH.265に変換してもよい。 Also, the server may distribute the video data after performing transcoding to change the encoding method of the video data. For example, the server may convert the MPEG encoding system to the VP encoding. 264. It may be converted into H.265.
 このように、符号化処理は、端末、又は1以上のサーバにより行うことが可能である。よって、以下では、処理を行う主体として「サーバ」又は「端末」等の記載を用いるが、サーバで行われる処理の一部又は全てが端末で行われてもよいし、端末で行われる処理の一部又は全てがサーバで行われてもよい。また、これらに関しては、復号処理についても同様である。 Thus, the encoding process can be performed by a terminal or one or more servers. Therefore, in the following, description such as “server” or “terminal” is used as the subject performing processing, but part or all of processing performed by the server may be performed by the terminal, or processing performed by the terminal may be performed. Some or all may be performed at the server. The same applies to the decoding process.
 [3D、マルチアングル]
 近年では、互いにほぼ同期した複数のカメラex113及び/又はスマートフォンex115などの端末により撮影された異なるシーン、又は、同一シーンを異なるアングルから撮影した画像或いは映像を統合して利用することも増えてきている。各端末で撮影した映像は、別途取得した端末間の相対的な位置関係、又は、映像に含まれる特徴点が一致する領域などに基づいて統合される。
[3D, multi-angle]
In recent years, different scenes photographed by terminals such as a plurality of cameras ex113 and / or smartphones ex115 that are substantially synchronized with each other, or images or videos obtained by photographing the same scene from different angles have been increasingly used. Yes. The video captured by each terminal is integrated based on the relative positional relationship between the terminals acquired separately or the region where the feature points included in the video match.
 サーバは、2次元の動画像を符号化するだけでなく、動画像のシーン解析などに基づいて自動的に、又は、ユーザが指定した時刻において、静止画を符号化し、受信端末に送信してもよい。サーバは、さらに、撮影端末間の相対的な位置関係を取得できる場合には、2次元の動画像だけでなく、同一シーンが異なるアングルから撮影された映像に基づき、当該シーンの3次元形状を生成できる。なお、サーバは、ポイントクラウドなどにより生成した3次元のデータを別途符号化してもよいし、3次元データを用いて人物又はオブジェクトを認識或いは追跡した結果に基づいて、受信端末に送信する映像を、複数の端末で撮影した映像から選択、又は、再構成して生成してもよい。 The server not only encodes a two-dimensional moving image, but also encodes a still image automatically based on a scene analysis of the moving image or at a time specified by the user and transmits it to the receiving terminal. Also good. In addition, when the server can acquire the relative positional relationship between the photographing terminals, the server obtains the three-dimensional shape of the scene based on not only the two-dimensional moving image but also the video obtained by photographing the same scene from different angles. Can be generated. The server may separately encode the three-dimensional data generated by the point cloud or the like, and the video to be transmitted to the receiving terminal based on the result of recognizing or tracking the person or the object using the three-dimensional data. Alternatively, the images may be selected or reconstructed from videos captured by a plurality of terminals.
 このようにして、ユーザは、各撮影端末に対応する各映像を任意に選択してシーンを楽しむこともできるし、複数画像又は映像を用いて再構成された3次元データから任意視点の映像を切り出したコンテンツを楽しむこともできる。さらに、映像と同様に音も複数の相異なるアングルから収音され、サーバは、映像に合わせて特定のアングル又は空間からの音を映像と多重化して送信してもよい。 In this way, the user can arbitrarily select each video corresponding to each photographing terminal and enjoy a scene, or can display a video of an arbitrary viewpoint from three-dimensional data reconstructed using a plurality of images or videos. You can also enjoy the clipped content. Furthermore, as with video, sound is collected from a plurality of different angles, and the server may multiplex and transmit sound from a specific angle or space according to the video.
 また、近年ではVirtual Reality(VR)及びAugmented Reality(AR)など、現実世界と仮想世界とを対応付けたコンテンツも普及してきている。VRの画像の場合、サーバは、右目用及び左目用の視点画像をそれぞれ作成し、Multi-View Coding(MVC)などにより各視点映像間で参照を許容する符号化を行ってもよいし、互いに参照せずに別ストリームとして符号化してもよい。別ストリームの復号時には、ユーザの視点に応じて仮想的な3次元空間が再現されるように互いに同期させて再生するとよい。 Also, in recent years, content that associates the real world with the virtual world, such as Virtual Reality (VR) and Augmented Reality (AR), has become widespread. In the case of a VR image, the server may create viewpoint images for the right eye and the left eye, respectively, and perform encoding that allows reference between the viewpoint videos by Multi-View Coding (MVC) or the like. You may encode as another stream, without referring. At the time of decoding another stream, it is preferable to reproduce in synchronization with each other so that a virtual three-dimensional space is reproduced according to the viewpoint of the user.
 ARの画像の場合には、サーバは、現実空間のカメラ情報に、仮想空間上の仮想物体情報を、3次元的位置又はユーザの視点の動きに基づいて重畳する。復号装置は、仮想物体情報及び3次元データを取得又は保持し、ユーザの視点の動きに応じて2次元画像を生成し、スムーズにつなげることで重畳データを作成してもよい。または、復号装置は仮想物体情報の依頼に加えてユーザの視点の動きをサーバに送信し、サーバは、サーバに保持される3次元データから受信した視点の動きに合わせて重畳データを作成し、重畳データを符号化して復号装置に配信してもよい。なお、重畳データは、RGB以外に透過度を示すα値を有し、サーバは、3次元データから作成されたオブジェクト以外の部分のα値が0などに設定し、当該部分が透過する状態で、符号化してもよい。もしくは、サーバは、クロマキーのように所定の値のRGB値を背景に設定し、オブジェクト以外の部分は背景色にしたデータを生成してもよい。 In the case of an AR image, the server superimposes virtual object information in the virtual space on the camera information in the real space based on the three-dimensional position or the movement of the user's viewpoint. The decoding device may acquire or hold virtual object information and three-dimensional data, generate a two-dimensional image according to the movement of the user's viewpoint, and create superimposition data by connecting them smoothly. Alternatively, the decoding device transmits the movement of the user's viewpoint to the server in addition to the request for the virtual object information, and the server creates superimposition data according to the movement of the viewpoint received from the three-dimensional data held in the server, The superimposed data may be encoded and distributed to the decoding device. Note that the superimposed data has an α value indicating transparency in addition to RGB, and the server sets the α value of a portion other than the object created from the three-dimensional data to 0 or the like, and the portion is transparent. May be encoded. Alternatively, the server may generate data in which a RGB value of a predetermined value is set as the background, such as a chroma key, and the portion other than the object is set to the background color.
 同様に配信されたデータの復号処理はクライアントである各端末で行っても、サーバ側で行ってもよいし、互いに分担して行ってもよい。一例として、ある端末が、一旦サーバに受信リクエストを送り、そのリクエストに応じたコンテンツを他の端末で受信し復号処理を行い、ディスプレイを有する装置に復号済みの信号が送信されてもよい。通信可能な端末自体の性能によらず処理を分散して適切なコンテンツを選択することで画質のよいデータを再生することができる。また、他の例として大きなサイズの画像データをTV等で受信しつつ、鑑賞者の個人端末にピクチャが分割されたタイルなど一部の領域が復号されて表示されてもよい。これにより、全体像を共有化しつつ、自身の担当分野又はより詳細に確認したい領域を手元で確認することができる。 Similarly, the decryption processing of the distributed data may be performed at each terminal as a client, may be performed on the server side, or may be performed in a shared manner. As an example, a terminal may once send a reception request to the server, receive content corresponding to the request at another terminal, perform a decoding process, and transmit a decoded signal to a device having a display. Regardless of the performance of the communicable terminal itself, it is possible to reproduce data with good image quality by distributing processing and selecting appropriate content. As another example, a part of a region such as a tile in which a picture is divided may be decoded and displayed on a viewer's personal terminal while receiving large-size image data on a TV or the like. Accordingly, it is possible to confirm at hand the area in which the person is responsible or the area to be confirmed in more detail while sharing the whole image.
 また今後は、屋内外にかかわらず近距離、中距離、又は長距離の無線通信が複数使用可能な状況下で、MPEG-DASHなどの配信システム規格を利用して、接続中の通信に対して適切なデータを切り替えながらシームレスにコンテンツを受信することが予想される。これにより、ユーザは、自身の端末のみならず屋内外に設置されたディスプレイなどの復号装置又は表示装置を自由に選択しながらリアルタイムで切り替えられる。また、自身の位置情報などに基づいて、復号する端末及び表示する端末を切り替えながら復号を行うことができる。これにより、目的地への移動中に、表示可能なデバイスが埋め込まれた隣の建物の壁面又は地面の一部に地図情報を表示させながら移動することも可能になる。また、符号化データが受信端末から短時間でアクセスできるサーバにキャッシュされている、又は、コンテンツ・デリバリー・サービスにおけるエッジサーバにコピーされている、などの、ネットワーク上での符号化データへのアクセス容易性に基づいて、受信データのビットレートを切り替えることも可能である。 In the future, in the situation where multiple short-distance, medium-distance, or long-distance wireless communications can be used regardless of whether indoors or outdoors, using a distribution system standard such as MPEG-DASH, It is expected that content is received seamlessly while switching appropriate data. Accordingly, the user can switch in real time while freely selecting a decoding device or a display device such as a display installed indoors or outdoors as well as his / her own terminal. Also, decoding can be performed while switching between a terminal to be decoded and a terminal to be displayed based on its own position information. This makes it possible to move while displaying map information on the wall surface of a neighboring building or a part of the ground in which a displayable device is embedded while moving to the destination. Also, access to encoded data on the network, such as when the encoded data is cached in a server that can be accessed from the receiving terminal in a short time, or copied to the edge server in the content delivery service. It is also possible to switch the bit rate of received data based on ease.
 [スケーラブル符号化]
 コンテンツの切り替えに関して、図21に示す、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法を応用して圧縮符号化されたスケーラブルなストリームを用いて説明する。サーバは、個別のストリームとして内容は同じで質の異なるストリームを複数有していても構わないが、図示するようにレイヤに分けて符号化を行うことで実現される時間的/空間的スケーラブルなストリームの特徴を活かして、コンテンツを切り替える構成であってもよい。つまり、復号側が性能という内的要因と通信帯域の状態などの外的要因とに応じてどのレイヤまで復号するかを決定することで、復号側は、低解像度のコンテンツと高解像度のコンテンツとを自由に切り替えて復号できる。例えば移動中にスマートフォンex115で視聴していた映像の続きを、帰宅後にインターネットTV等の機器で視聴したい場合には、当該機器は、同じストリームを異なるレイヤまで復号すればよいので、サーバ側の負担を軽減できる。
[Scalable coding]
The content switching will be described using a scalable stream that is compression-encoded by applying the moving image encoding method shown in each of the above embodiments shown in FIG. The server may have a plurality of streams of the same content and different quality as individual streams, but the temporal / spatial scalable implementation realized by dividing into layers as shown in the figure. The configuration may be such that the content is switched by utilizing the characteristics of the stream. In other words, the decoding side decides which layer to decode according to internal factors such as performance and external factors such as the state of communication bandwidth, so that the decoding side can combine low-resolution content and high-resolution content. You can switch freely and decrypt. For example, when the user wants to continue watching the video that was viewed on the smartphone ex115 while moving on a device such as an Internet TV after returning home, the device only has to decode the same stream to a different layer, so the load on the server side Can be reduced.
 さらに、上記のように、レイヤ毎にピクチャが符号化されており、ベースレイヤの上位にエンハンスメントレイヤが存在するスケーラビリティを実現する構成以外に、エンハンスメントレイヤが画像の統計情報などに基づくメタ情報を含み、復号側が、メタ情報に基づきベースレイヤのピクチャを超解像することで高画質化したコンテンツを生成してもよい。超解像とは、同一解像度におけるSN比の向上、及び、解像度の拡大のいずれであってもよい。メタ情報は、超解像処理に用いる線形或いは非線形のフィルタ係数を特定するため情報、又は、超解像処理に用いるフィルタ処理、機械学習或いは最小2乗演算におけるパラメータ値を特定する情報などを含む。 Further, as described above, the enhancement layer includes meta information based on image statistical information, etc., in addition to the configuration in which the picture is encoded for each layer and the enhancement layer exists above the base layer. The decoding side may generate content with high image quality by super-resolution of the base layer picture based on the meta information. Super-resolution may be either improvement of the SN ratio at the same resolution or enlargement of the resolution. The meta information includes information for specifying a linear or non-linear filter coefficient used for super-resolution processing, or information for specifying a parameter value in filter processing, machine learning, or least square calculation used for super-resolution processing. .
 または、画像内のオブジェクトなどの意味合いに応じてピクチャがタイル等に分割されており、復号側が、復号するタイルを選択することで一部の領域だけを復号する構成であってもよい。また、オブジェクトの属性(人物、車、ボールなど)と映像内の位置(同一画像における座標位置など)とをメタ情報として格納することで、復号側は、メタ情報に基づいて所望のオブジェクトの位置を特定し、そのオブジェクトを含むタイルを決定できる。例えば、図22に示すように、メタ情報は、HEVCにおけるSEIメッセージなど画素データとは異なるデータ格納構造を用いて格納される。このメタ情報は、例えば、メインオブジェクトの位置、サイズ、又は色彩などを示す。 Alternatively, the picture may be divided into tiles or the like according to the meaning of the object in the image, and the decoding side may select only a part of the region by selecting the tile to be decoded. Further, by storing object attributes (person, car, ball, etc.) and positions in the video (coordinate positions in the same image, etc.) as meta information, the decoding side can determine the position of the desired object based on the meta information Can be identified and the tile containing the object can be determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, the meta information is stored using a data storage structure different from the pixel data such as the SEI message in HEVC. This meta information indicates, for example, the position, size, or color of the main object.
 また、ストリーム、シーケンス又はランダムアクセス単位など、複数のピクチャから構成される単位でメタ情報が格納されてもよい。これにより、復号側は、特定人物が映像内に出現する時刻などが取得でき、ピクチャ単位の情報と合わせることで、オブジェクトが存在するピクチャ、及び、ピクチャ内でのオブジェクトの位置を特定できる。 Also, meta information may be stored in units composed of a plurality of pictures, such as streams, sequences, or random access units. Thereby, the decoding side can acquire the time when the specific person appears in the video, etc., and can match the picture in which the object exists and the position of the object in the picture by combining with the information in units of pictures.
 [Webページの最適化]
 図23は、コンピュータex111等におけるwebページの表示画面例を示す図である。図24は、スマートフォンex115等におけるwebページの表示画面例を示す図である。図23及び図24に示すようにwebページが、画像コンテンツへのリンクであるリンク画像を複数含む場合があり、閲覧するデバイスによってその見え方は異なる。画面上に複数のリンク画像が見える場合には、ユーザが明示的にリンク画像を選択するまで、又は画面の中央付近にリンク画像が近付く或いはリンク画像の全体が画面内に入るまでは、表示装置(復号装置)は、リンク画像として各コンテンツが有する静止画又はIピクチャを表示したり、複数の静止画又はIピクチャ等でgifアニメのような映像を表示したり、ベースレイヤのみ受信して映像を復号及び表示したりする。
[Web page optimization]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a web page display screen on the computer ex111 or the like. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a display screen example of a web page on the smartphone ex115 or the like. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the web page may include a plurality of link images that are links to the image content, and the appearance differs depending on the browsing device. When a plurality of link images are visible on the screen, the display device until the user explicitly selects the link image, or until the link image approaches the center of the screen or the entire link image enters the screen. The (decoding device) displays a still image or an I picture included in each content as a link image, displays a video like a gif animation with a plurality of still images or I pictures, or receives only a base layer to receive a video. Are decoded and displayed.
 ユーザによりリンク画像が選択された場合、表示装置は、ベースレイヤを最優先にして復号する。なお、webページを構成するHTMLにスケーラブルなコンテンツであることを示す情報があれば、表示装置は、エンハンスメントレイヤまで復号してもよい。また、リアルタイム性を担保するために、選択される前又は通信帯域が非常に厳しい場合には、表示装置は、前方参照のピクチャ(Iピクチャ、Pピクチャ、前方参照のみのBピクチャ)のみを復号及び表示することで、先頭ピクチャの復号時刻と表示時刻との間の遅延(コンテンツの復号開始から表示開始までの遅延)を低減できる。また、表示装置は、ピクチャの参照関係を敢えて無視して全てのBピクチャ及びPピクチャを前方参照にして粗く復号し、時間が経ち受信したピクチャが増えるにつれて正常の復号を行ってもよい。 When the link image is selected by the user, the display device decodes the base layer with the highest priority. If there is information indicating that the HTML constituting the web page is scalable content, the display device may decode up to the enhancement layer. Also, in order to ensure real-time properties, the display device only decodes forward reference pictures (I picture, P picture, forward reference only B picture) before being selected or when the communication bandwidth is very strict. In addition, the delay between the decoding time of the first picture and the display time (delay from the start of content decoding to the start of display) can be reduced by displaying. Further, the display device may intentionally ignore the reference relationship of pictures and roughly decode all B pictures and P pictures with forward reference, and perform normal decoding as the number of received pictures increases over time.
 [自動走行]
 また、車の自動走行又は走行支援のため2次元又は3次元の地図情報などの静止画又は映像データを送受信する場合、受信端末は、1以上のレイヤに属する画像データに加えて、メタ情報として天候又は工事の情報なども受信し、これらを対応付けて復号してもよい。なお、メタ情報は、レイヤに属してもよいし、単に画像データと多重化されてもよい。
[Automatic driving]
In addition, when transmitting and receiving still image or video data such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional map information for automatic driving or driving support of a car, the receiving terminal adds meta data to image data belonging to one or more layers. Weather or construction information may also be received and decoded in association with each other. The meta information may belong to a layer or may be simply multiplexed with image data.
 この場合、受信端末を含む車、ドローン又は飛行機などが移動するため、受信端末は、当該受信端末の位置情報を受信要求時に送信することで、基地局ex106~ex110を切り替えながらシームレスな受信及び復号を実現できる。また、受信端末は、ユーザの選択、ユーザの状況又は通信帯域の状態に応じて、メタ情報をどの程度受信するか、又は地図情報をどの程度更新していくかを動的に切り替えることが可能になる。 In this case, since the car, drone, airplane, or the like including the receiving terminal moves, the receiving terminal transmits the position information of the receiving terminal at the time of the reception request, thereby seamless reception and decoding while switching the base stations ex106 to ex110. Can be realized. In addition, the receiving terminal can dynamically switch how much meta-information is received or how much map information is updated according to the user's selection, the user's situation, or the communication band state. become.
 以上のようにして、コンテンツ供給システムex100では、ユーザが送信した符号化された情報をリアルタイムでクライアントが受信して復号し、再生することができる。 As described above, in the content supply system ex100, the encoded information transmitted by the user can be received, decoded and reproduced in real time by the client.
 [個人コンテンツの配信]
 また、コンテンツ供給システムex100では、映像配信業者による高画質で長時間のコンテンツのみならず、個人による低画質で短時間のコンテンツのユニキャスト、又はマルチキャスト配信が可能である。また、このような個人のコンテンツは今後も増加していくと考えられる。個人コンテンツをより優れたコンテンツにするために、サーバは、編集処理を行ってから符号化処理を行ってもよい。これは例えば、以下のような構成で実現できる。
[Distribution of personal contents]
Further, the content supply system ex100 can perform not only high-quality and long-time content by a video distributor but also unicast or multicast distribution of low-quality and short-time content by an individual. Moreover, such personal contents are expected to increase in the future. In order to make personal content superior, the server may perform the encoding process after performing the editing process. This can be realized, for example, with the following configuration.
 撮影時にリアルタイム又は蓄積して撮影後に、サーバは、原画又は符号化済みデータから撮影エラー、シーン探索、意味の解析、及びオブジェクト検出などの認識処理を行う。そして、サーバは、認識結果に基いて手動又は自動で、ピントずれ又は手ブレなどを補正したり、明度が他のピクチャに比べて低い又は焦点が合っていないシーンなどの重要性の低いシーンを削除したり、オブジェクトのエッジを強調したり、色合いを変化させるなどの編集を行う。サーバは、編集結果に基いて編集後のデータを符号化する。また撮影時刻が長すぎると視聴率が下がることも知られており、サーバは、撮影時間に応じて特定の時間範囲内のコンテンツになるように上記のように重要性が低いシーンのみならず動きが少ないシーンなどを、画像処理結果に基き自動でクリップしてもよい。または、サーバは、シーンの意味解析の結果に基づいてダイジェストを生成して符号化してもよい。 After shooting, the server performs recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, semantic analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data. Then, the server manually or automatically corrects out-of-focus or camera shake based on the recognition result, or selects a less important scene such as a scene whose brightness is lower than that of other pictures or is out of focus. Edit such as deleting, emphasizing the edge of an object, and changing the hue. The server encodes the edited data based on the editing result. It is also known that if the shooting time is too long, the audience rating will decrease, and the server will move not only in the less important scenes as described above, but also in motion according to the shooting time. A scene with few images may be automatically clipped based on the image processing result. Alternatively, the server may generate and encode a digest based on the result of the semantic analysis of the scene.
 なお、個人コンテンツには、そのままでは著作権、著作者人格権、又は肖像権等の侵害となるものが写り込んでいるケースもあり、共有する範囲が意図した範囲を超えてしまうなど個人にとって不都合な場合もある。よって、例えば、サーバは、画面の周辺部の人の顔、又は家の中などを敢えて焦点が合わない画像に変更して符号化してもよい。また、サーバは、符号化対象画像内に、予め登録した人物とは異なる人物の顔が映っているかどうかを認識し、映っている場合には、顔の部分にモザイクをかけるなどの処理を行ってもよい。または、符号化の前処理又は後処理として、著作権などの観点からユーザが画像を加工したい人物又は背景領域を指定し、サーバは、指定された領域を別の映像に置き換える、又は焦点をぼかすなどの処理を行うことも可能である。人物であれば、動画像において人物をトラッキングしながら、顔の部分の映像を置き換えることができる。 In some cases, personal content may include infringements such as copyrights, author's personality rights, or portrait rights, which are inconvenient for individuals, such as exceeding the intended scope of sharing. In some cases. Therefore, for example, the server may change and encode the face of the person in the periphery of the screen or the inside of the house into an unfocused image. In addition, the server recognizes whether or not a face of a person different from the person registered in advance is shown in the encoding target image, and if so, performs processing such as applying a mosaic to the face part. May be. Alternatively, as a pre-processing or post-processing of encoding, the user designates a person or background area that the user wants to process an image from the viewpoint of copyright, etc., and the server replaces the designated area with another video or blurs the focus. It is also possible to perform such processing. If it is a person, the face image can be replaced while tracking the person in the moving image.
 また、データ量の小さい個人コンテンツの視聴はリアルタイム性の要求が強いため、帯域幅にもよるが、復号装置は、まずベースレイヤを最優先で受信して復号及び再生を行う。復号装置は、この間にエンハンスメントレイヤを受信し、再生がループされる場合など2回以上再生される場合に、エンハンスメントレイヤも含めて高画質の映像を再生してもよい。このようにスケーラブルな符号化が行われているストリームであれば、未選択時又は見始めた段階では粗い動画だが、徐々にストリームがスマートになり画像がよくなるような体験を提供することができる。スケーラブル符号化以外にも、1回目に再生される粗いストリームと、1回目の動画を参照して符号化される2回目のストリームとが1つのストリームとして構成されていても同様の体験を提供できる。 In addition, since viewing of personal content with a small amount of data is strongly demanded for real-time performance, the decoding device first receives the base layer with the highest priority and performs decoding and reproduction, depending on the bandwidth. The decoding device may receive the enhancement layer during this time, and may play back high-quality video including the enhancement layer when played back twice or more, such as when playback is looped. A stream that is scalable in this way can provide an experience in which the stream becomes smarter and the image is improved gradually, although it is a rough moving picture when it is not selected or at the beginning of viewing. In addition to scalable coding, the same experience can be provided even if the coarse stream played back the first time and the second stream coded with reference to the first video are configured as one stream. .
 [その他の使用例]
 また、これらの符号化又は復号処理は、一般的に各端末が有するLSIex500において処理される。LSIex500は、ワンチップであっても複数チップからなる構成であってもよい。なお、動画像符号化又は復号用のソフトウェアをコンピュータex111等で読み取り可能な何らかの記録メディア(CD-ROM、フレキシブルディスク、又はハードディスクなど)に組み込み、そのソフトウェアを用いて符号化又は復号処理を行ってもよい。さらに、スマートフォンex115がカメラ付きである場合には、そのカメラで取得した動画データを送信してもよい。このときの動画データはスマートフォンex115が有するLSIex500で符号化処理されたデータである。
[Other usage examples]
In addition, these encoding or decoding processes are generally processed in the LSI ex500 included in each terminal. The LSI ex500 may be configured as a single chip or a plurality of chips. Note that moving image encoding or decoding software is incorporated into some recording medium (CD-ROM, flexible disk, hard disk, etc.) that can be read by the computer ex111 and the like, and encoding or decoding processing is performed using the software. Also good. Furthermore, when the smartphone ex115 has a camera, moving image data acquired by the camera may be transmitted. The moving image data at this time is data encoded by the LSI ex500 included in the smartphone ex115.
 なお、LSIex500は、アプリケーションソフトをダウンロードしてアクティベートする構成であってもよい。この場合、端末は、まず、当該端末がコンテンツの符号化方式に対応しているか、又は、特定サービスの実行能力を有するかを判定する。端末がコンテンツの符号化方式に対応していない場合、又は、特定サービスの実行能力を有さない場合、端末は、コーデック又はアプリケーションソフトをダウンロードし、その後、コンテンツ取得及び再生する。 Note that the LSI ex500 may be configured to download and activate application software. In this case, the terminal first determines whether the terminal is compatible with the content encoding method or has a specific service execution capability. If the terminal does not support the content encoding method or does not have the capability to execute a specific service, the terminal downloads a codec or application software, and then acquires and reproduces the content.
 また、インターネットex101を介したコンテンツ供給システムex100に限らず、デジタル放送用システムにも上記各実施の形態の少なくとも動画像符号化装置(画像符号化装置)又は動画像復号化装置(画像復号装置)のいずれかを組み込むことができる。衛星などを利用して放送用の電波に映像と音が多重化された多重化データを載せて送受信するため、コンテンツ供給システムex100のユニキャストがし易い構成に対してマルチキャスト向きであるという違いがあるが符号化処理及び復号処理に関しては同様の応用が可能である。 Further, not only the content supply system ex100 via the Internet ex101, but also a digital broadcasting system, at least the moving image encoding device (image encoding device) or the moving image decoding device (image decoding device) of the above embodiments. Any of these can be incorporated. The difference is that the unicasting of the content supply system ex100 is suitable for multicasting because it uses a satellite or the like to transmit and receive multiplexed data in which video and sound are multiplexed on broadcasting radio waves. However, the same application is possible for the encoding process and the decoding process.
 [ハードウェア構成]
 図25は、スマートフォンex115を示す図である。また、図26は、スマートフォンex115の構成例を示す図である。スマートフォンex115は、基地局ex110との間で電波を送受信するためのアンテナex450と、映像及び静止画を撮ることが可能なカメラ部ex465と、カメラ部ex465で撮像した映像、及びアンテナex450で受信した映像等が復号されたデータを表示する表示部ex458とを備える。スマートフォンex115は、さらに、タッチパネル等である操作部ex466と、音声又は音響を出力するためのスピーカ等である音声出力部ex457と、音声を入力するためのマイク等である音声入力部ex456と、撮影した映像或いは静止画、録音した音声、受信した映像或いは静止画、メール等の符号化されたデータ、又は、復号化されたデータを保存可能なメモリ部ex467と、ユーザを特定し、ネットワークをはじめ各種データへのアクセスの認証をするためのSIMex468とのインタフェース部であるスロット部ex464とを備える。なお、メモリ部ex467の代わりに外付けメモリが用いられてもよい。
[Hardware configuration]
FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating the smartphone ex115. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the smartphone ex115. The smartphone ex115 receives the antenna ex450 for transmitting and receiving radio waves to and from the base station ex110, the camera unit ex465 capable of taking video and still images, the video captured by the camera unit ex465, and the antenna ex450. A display unit ex458 for displaying data obtained by decoding the video or the like. The smartphone ex115 further includes an operation unit ex466 that is a touch panel or the like, a voice output unit ex457 that is a speaker or the like for outputting voice or sound, a voice input unit ex456 that is a microphone or the like for inputting voice, Memory unit ex467 that can store encoded video or still image, recorded audio, received video or still image, encoded data such as mail, or decoded data, and a user, and network A slot part ex464, which is an interface part with the SIMex 468 for authenticating access to various data. An external memory may be used instead of the memory unit ex467.
 また、表示部ex458及び操作部ex466等を統括的に制御する主制御部ex460と、電源回路部ex461、操作入力制御部ex462、映像信号処理部ex455、カメラインタフェース部ex463、ディスプレイ制御部ex459、変調/復調部ex452、多重/分離部ex453、音声信号処理部ex454、スロット部ex464、及びメモリ部ex467とがバスex470を介して接続されている。 In addition, a main control unit ex460 that comprehensively controls the display unit ex458, the operation unit ex466, and the like, a power supply circuit unit ex461, an operation input control unit ex462, a video signal processing unit ex455, a camera interface unit ex463, a display control unit ex459, a modulation / Demodulation unit ex452, multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453, audio signal processing unit ex454, slot unit ex464, and memory unit ex467 are connected via bus ex470.
 電源回路部ex461は、ユーザの操作により電源キーがオン状態にされると、バッテリパックから各部に対して電力を供給することによりスマートフォンex115を動作可能な状態に起動する。 When the power key is turned on by a user operation, the power supply circuit unit ex461 starts up the smartphone ex115 in an operable state by supplying power from the battery pack to each unit.
 スマートフォンex115は、CPU、ROM及びRAM等を有する主制御部ex460の制御に基づいて、通話及データ通信等の処理を行う。通話時は、音声入力部ex456で収音した音声信号を音声信号処理部ex454でデジタル音声信号に変換し、これを変調/復調部ex452でスペクトラム拡散処理し、送信/受信部ex451でデジタルアナログ変換処理及び周波数変換処理を施した後にアンテナex450を介して送信する。また受信データを増幅して周波数変換処理及びアナログデジタル変換処理を施し、変調/復調部ex452でスペクトラム逆拡散処理し、音声信号処理部ex454でアナログ音声信号に変換した後、これを音声出力部ex457から出力する。データ通信モード時は、本体部の操作部ex466等の操作によってテキスト、静止画、又は映像データが操作入力制御部ex462を介して主制御部ex460に送出され、同様に送受信処理が行われる。データ通信モード時に映像、静止画、又は映像と音声を送信する場合、映像信号処理部ex455は、メモリ部ex467に保存されている映像信号又はカメラ部ex465から入力された映像信号を上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法によって圧縮符号化し、符号化された映像データを多重/分離部ex453に送出する。また、音声信号処理部ex454は、映像又は静止画等をカメラ部ex465で撮像中に音声入力部ex456で収音した音声信号を符号化し、符号化された音声データを多重/分離部ex453に送出する。多重/分離部ex453は、符号化済み映像データと符号化済み音声データを所定の方式で多重化し、変調/復調部(変調/復調回路部)ex452、及び送信/受信部ex451で変調処理及び変換処理を施してアンテナex450を介して送信する。 The smartphone ex115 performs processing such as calling and data communication based on the control of the main control unit ex460 having a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like. During a call, the voice signal picked up by the voice input unit ex456 is converted into a digital voice signal by the voice signal processing unit ex454, spread spectrum processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and digital / analog conversion is performed by the transmission / reception unit ex451. After performing the processing and the frequency conversion processing, the data is transmitted via the antenna ex450. Further, the received data is amplified and subjected to frequency conversion processing and analog-digital conversion processing, spectrum despreading processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and converted to analog audio signal by the audio signal processing unit ex454, and then this is output to the audio output unit ex457. Output from. In the data communication mode, text, still image, or video data is sent to the main control unit ex460 via the operation input control unit ex462 by the operation of the operation unit ex466 of the main body unit, and transmission / reception processing is performed similarly. When transmitting video, still image, or video and audio in the data communication mode, the video signal processing unit ex455 uses the video signal stored in the memory unit ex467 or the video signal input from the camera unit ex465 as described above. The video data is compressed and encoded by the moving image encoding method shown in the form, and the encoded video data is sent to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453. The audio signal processing unit ex454 encodes the audio signal picked up by the audio input unit ex456 while the camera unit ex465 captures a video or a still image, and sends the encoded audio data to the multiplexing / separating unit ex453. To do. The multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes the encoded video data and the encoded audio data by a predetermined method, and the modulation / demodulation unit (modulation / demodulation circuit unit) ex452 and the modulation / demodulation unit ex451 perform modulation processing and conversion. The data is processed and transmitted via the antenna ex450.
 電子メール又はチャットに添付された映像、又はウェブページ等にリンクされた映像を受信した場合、アンテナex450を介して受信された多重化データを復号するために、多重/分離部ex453は、多重化データを分離することにより、多重化データを映像データのビットストリームと音声データのビットストリームとに分け、同期バスex470を介して符号化された映像データを映像信号処理部ex455に供給するとともに、符号化された音声データを音声信号処理部ex454に供給する。映像信号処理部ex455は、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法に対応した動画像復号化方法によって映像信号を復号し、ディスプレイ制御部ex459を介して表示部ex458から、リンクされた動画像ファイルに含まれる映像又は静止画が表示される。また音声信号処理部ex454は、音声信号を復号し、音声出力部ex457から音声が出力される。なおリアルタイムストリーミングが普及しているため、ユーザの状況によっては音声の再生が社会的にふさわしくない場も起こりえる。そのため、初期値としては、音声信号は再生せず映像データのみを再生する構成の方が望ましい。ユーザが映像データをクリックするなど操作を行った場合にのみ音声を同期して再生してもよい。 In order to decode the multiplexed data received via the antenna ex450 when the video attached to the e-mail or chat, or the video linked to the web page or the like is received, the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 performs multiplexing By separating the data, the multiplexed data is divided into a bit stream of video data and a bit stream of audio data, and the encoded video data is supplied to the video signal processing unit ex455 via the synchronization bus ex470. The converted audio data is supplied to the audio signal processing unit ex454. The video signal processing unit ex455 decodes the video signal by the video decoding method corresponding to the video encoding method shown in each of the above embodiments, and is linked from the display unit ex458 via the display control unit ex459. A video or still image included in the moving image file is displayed. The audio signal processing unit ex454 decodes the audio signal, and the audio is output from the audio output unit ex457. Since real-time streaming is widespread, depending on the user's situation, there may be occasions where audio playback is not socially appropriate. Therefore, it is desirable that the initial value is a configuration in which only the video data is reproduced without reproducing the audio signal. Audio may be synchronized and played back only when the user performs an operation such as clicking on video data.
 またここではスマートフォンex115を例に説明したが、端末としては符号化器及び復号化器を両方持つ送受信型端末の他に、符号化器のみを有する送信端末、及び、復号化器のみを有する受信端末という3通りの実装形式が考えられる。さらに、デジタル放送用システムにおいて、映像データに音声データなどが多重化された多重化データを受信又は送信するとして説明したが、多重化データには、音声データ以外に映像に関連する文字データなどが多重化されてもよいし、多重化データではなく映像データ自体が受信又は送信されてもよい。 In addition, although the smartphone ex115 has been described here as an example, in addition to a transmission / reception terminal having both an encoder and a decoder as a terminal, a transmission terminal having only an encoder and a reception having only a decoder There are three possible mounting formats: terminals. Furthermore, in the digital broadcasting system, it has been described as receiving or transmitting multiplexed data in which audio data or the like is multiplexed with video data. However, multiplexed data includes character data related to video in addition to audio data. Multiplexing may be performed, and video data itself may be received or transmitted instead of multiplexed data.
 なお、CPUを含む主制御部ex460が符号化又は復号処理を制御するとして説明したが、端末はGPUを備えることも多い。よって、CPUとGPUで共通化されたメモリ、又は共通に使用できるようにアドレスが管理されているメモリにより、GPUの性能を活かして広い領域を一括して処理する構成でもよい。これにより符号化時間を短縮でき、リアルタイム性を確保し、低遅延を実現できる。特に動き探索、デブロックフィルタ、SAO(Sample Adaptive Offset)、及び変換・量子化の処理を、CPUではなく、GPUでピクチャなどの単位で一括して行うと効率的である。 In addition, although it has been described that the main control unit ex460 including the CPU controls the encoding or decoding process, the terminal often includes a GPU. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which a wide area is processed in a lump by utilizing the performance of the GPU by using a memory shared by the CPU and the GPU or a memory whose addresses are managed so as to be used in common. As a result, the encoding time can be shortened, real-time performance can be ensured, and low delay can be realized. In particular, it is efficient to perform motion search, deblocking filter, SAO (Sample Adaptive Offset), and transformation / quantization processing in batches in units of pictures or the like instead of the CPU.
 本開示は、例えば、テレビジョン受像機、デジタルビデオレコーダー、カーナビゲーション、携帯電話、デジタルカメラ、デジタルビデオカメラ、テレビ会議システム、又は、電子ミラー等に利用可能である。 The present disclosure can be used for, for example, a television receiver, a digital video recorder, a car navigation, a mobile phone, a digital camera, a digital video camera, a video conference system, or an electronic mirror.
12  現ブロック
20  参照可能領域
30  参照ブロック
40  参照可能領域から除外される領域
100  符号化装置
150  回路
152  メモリ
200  復号装置
250  回路
252  メモリ
12 current block 20 referenceable area 30 reference block 40 area 100 excluded from referenceable area 100 encoding device 150 circuit 152 memory 200 decoding device 250 circuit 252 memory

Claims (8)

  1.  回路と、
     メモリと、を備え、
     前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、
     画面内の符号化済みの画素から構成される予測ブロックと符号化対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを符号化し、
     前記ブロックベクトルの符号化において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報として、前記ブロックベクトルの前記第1成分から前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、前記ブロックベクトルを符号化する、
     符号化装置。
    Circuit,
    And a memory,
    The circuit uses the memory,
    Encode a block vector indicating the displacement of the position of the prediction block and the encoding target block composed of encoded pixels in the screen,
    In the encoding of the block vector, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is used as the information indicating the first component of the block vector. The block vector is encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size in the first direction of the encoding target block.
    Encoding device.
  2.  前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が、前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第2方向のサイズよりも小さいことである、
     請求項1に記載の符号化装置。
    The predetermined condition is that a second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction is larger than a size of the encoding target block in the second direction. It ’s small,
    The encoding device according to claim 1.
  3.  前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことである、
     請求項1に記載の符号化装置。
    The predetermined condition is that a second component of the block vector is not a negative value in a second direction that is different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
    The encoding device according to claim 1.
  4.  回路と、
     メモリと、を備え、
     前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、
     画面内の復号済みブロックの画素から構成される予測ブロックと復号対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを復号し、
     前記ブロックベクトルの復号において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを加算して前記ブロックベクトルを復号する、
     復号装置。
    Circuit,
    And a memory,
    The circuit uses the memory,
    Decoding a block vector indicating the displacement of the position of the prediction block and the decoding target block composed of pixels of the decoded block in the screen;
    In the decoding of the block vector, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the decoding target block is obtained with respect to a value obtained by decoding information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. Decoding the block vector by adding the sizes of the first direction of
    Decoding device.
  5.  前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第2方向のサイズよりも小さいことである、
     請求項4に記載の復号装置。
    The predetermined condition is that a second component of the block vector in a second direction that is different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is smaller than the size of the decoding target block in the second direction. That is,
    The decoding device according to claim 4.
  6.  前記所定の条件は、水平方向及び垂直方向のうち前記第1方向と異なる方向である第2方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第2成分が負の値でないことである、
     請求項4に記載の復号装置。
    The predetermined condition is that a second component of the block vector is not a negative value in a second direction that is different from the first direction in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.
    The decoding device according to claim 4.
  7.  画面内の符号化済みの画素から構成される予測ブロックと符号化対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを符号化し、
     前記ブロックベクトルの符号化において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報として、前記ブロックベクトルの前記第1成分から前記符号化対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを減算した値を用いて、前記ブロックベクトルを符号化する、
     符号化方法。
    Encode a block vector indicating the displacement of the position of the prediction block and the encoding target block composed of encoded pixels in the screen,
    In the encoding of the block vector, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is used as the information indicating the first component of the block vector. The block vector is encoded using a value obtained by subtracting the size in the first direction of the encoding target block.
    Encoding method.
  8.  画面内の復号済みブロックの画素から構成される予測ブロックと復号対象ブロックとの位置の変位を示すブロックベクトルを復号し、
     前記ブロックベクトルの復号において、所定の条件を満たす場合に、水平方向及び垂直方向のうちの第1方向における、前記ブロックベクトルの第1成分を示す情報を復号した値に対して、前記復号対象ブロックの前記第1方向のサイズを加算して前記ブロックベクトルを復号する、
     復号方法。
    Decoding a block vector indicating the displacement of the position of the prediction block and the decoding target block composed of pixels of the decoded block in the screen;
    In the decoding of the block vector, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the decoding target block is obtained with respect to a value obtained by decoding information indicating the first component of the block vector in the first direction of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. Decoding the block vector by adding the sizes of the first direction of
    Decryption method.
PCT/JP2019/019695 2018-06-11 2019-05-17 Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method WO2019239790A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201862683272P 2018-06-11 2018-06-11
US62/683,272 2018-06-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019239790A1 true WO2019239790A1 (en) 2019-12-19

Family

ID=68843220

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/019695 WO2019239790A1 (en) 2018-06-11 2019-05-17 Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019239790A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7541439B2 (en) 2020-02-19 2024-08-28 日本放送協会 Image encoding device, image decoding device, and programs thereof

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017519447A (en) * 2014-06-20 2017-07-13 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドQualcomm Incorporated Intra-block copy block vector signaling for video coding
JP2017535163A (en) * 2014-10-07 2017-11-24 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドQualcomm Incorporated Intra BC and inter integration

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017519447A (en) * 2014-06-20 2017-07-13 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドQualcomm Incorporated Intra-block copy block vector signaling for video coding
JP2017535163A (en) * 2014-10-07 2017-11-24 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドQualcomm Incorporated Intra BC and inter integration

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
RAPAKA, KRISHNA ET AL.: "Non-CEl: Block vector coding for Intra block copy mode", JOINT COLLABORATIVE TEAM ON VIDEO CODING (JCT-VC) OF ITU-T SG 16 WP 3, 17 October 2014 (2014-10-17), Strasbourg, FR, pages 1 - 5 *
RAPAKA, KRISHNA ET AL.: "Non-SCCEl: On Intra block vector difference redundancy remova", JOINT COLLABORATIVE TEAM ON VIDEO CODING (JCT-VC) OF ITU-T SG 16 WP 3, 30 June 2014 (2014-06-30), pages 1 - 3 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7541439B2 (en) 2020-02-19 2024-08-28 日本放送協会 Image encoding device, image decoding device, and programs thereof

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018181448A1 (en) Image coding device, image decoding device, image coding method, and image decoding method
WO2018199051A1 (en) Coding device, decoding device, coding method, and decoding method
WO2018212110A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
JP2019017066A (en) Coding apparatus, decoding apparatus, coding method, and decoding method
WO2018221631A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019151279A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
JP7339890B2 (en) Encoding device and decoding device
JPWO2018190207A1 (en) Decoding device, decoding method, and program
WO2018101288A1 (en) Encoding device, encoding method, decoding device, and decoding method
WO2018190207A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019208372A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019189346A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
WO2018212111A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
WO2018199050A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
WO2018193968A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
WO2019221103A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2018225593A1 (en) Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method
WO2019151284A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2018097115A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019189344A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
JP2022093625A (en) Encoder, decoder, encoding method, and decoding method
JP2022069458A (en) Encoder and encoding method
WO2018105579A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2018221553A1 (en) Encoding device, encoding method, decoding device, and decoding method
JP6910461B2 (en) Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19819172

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19819172

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1